User’s Guide
HP 86140A Series
Optical Spectrum Analyzer
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
General Safety Considerations
General Safety Considerations
This product has been designed and tested in accordance with IEC Publica-
tion 1010, Safety Requirements for Electronic Measuring Apparatus, and has
been supplied in a safe condition. The instruction documentation contains
information and warnings which must be followed by the user to ensure safe
operation and to maintain the product in a safe condition.
Install the instrument according to the enclosure protection provided.
This instrument does not protect against the ingress of water.
This instrument protects against finger access to hazardous parts within the
enclosure.
WA R N IN G
If this product is not used as specified, the protection provided by the
equipment could be impaired. This product must be used in a normal
condition (in which all means for protection are intact) only.
WA R N IN G
WA R N IN G
No operator serviceable parts inside. Refer servicing to qualified
service personnel. To prevent electrical shock do not remove covers.
This is a Safety Class 1 Product (provided with a protective earthing
ground incorporated in the power cord). The mains plug shall only be
inserted in a socket outlet provided with a protective earth contact.
Any interruption of the protective conductor inside or outside of the
instrument is likely to make the instrument dangerous. Intentional
interruption is prohibited.
WA R N IN G
C A U T I O N
To prevent electrical shock, disconnect the instrument from mains
before cleaning. Use a dry cloth or one slightly dampened with water
to clean the external case parts. Do not attempt to clean internally.
Fiber-optic connectors are easily damaged when connected to dirty or
damaged cables and accessories. The HP 86140 series’s front-panel INPUT
connector is no exception. When you use improper cleaning and handling
techniques, you risk expensive instrument repairs, damaged cables, and
compromised measurements. Before you connect any fiber-optic cable to the
HP 86140 series, refer to “Cleaning Connections for Accurate Measurements”
on page 6-10.
C A U T I O N
This product is designed for use in Installation Category II and Pollution
Degree 2 per IEC 1010 and 664 respectively.
iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
General Safety Considerations
C A U T I O N
C A U T I O N
Do not usetoo muchliquid in cleaning the opticalspectrum analyzer. Water can
enter the front-panel keyboard, damaging sensitive electronic components.
VENTILATION REQUIREMENTS: When installing the product in a cabinet, the
convection into and out of the product must not be restricted. The ambient
temperature (outside the cabinet) must be less than the maximum operating
°
temperature of the product by 4 C for every 100 watts dissipated in the
cabinet. If the total power dissipated in the cabinet is greater than 800 watts,
then forced convection must be used.
C A U T I O N
C A U T I O N
C A U T I O N
Always use the three-prong AC power cord supplied with this instrument.
Failure to ensure adequate earth grounding by not using this cord may cause
instrument damage.
Do not
connect ac power until you have verified the line voltage is correct as
described in “Line Power Requirements” on page 1-7. Damage to the
equipment could result.
This instrument has autoranging line voltage input. Be sure the supply voltage
is within the specified range.
iv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
HP 86143/5 Front and Rear Panels 2-6
The Menus 3-7
The Markers Menus 3-21
4 Remote Operation
CALibration Subsystem Commands 4-68
DISPlay Subsystem Commands 4-71
FORMat Subsystem Commands 4-76
HCOPy Subsystem Commands 4-77
INITiate Subsystem Commands 4-78
MEMory Subsystem Commands 4-79
Contents-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
STATus Subsystem Commands 4-91
Overview 5-2
OSA Notices 5-16
OSA Errors 5-35
6 Reference
AC Line-Power Cords 6-4
Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service Offices 6-24
7 Specifications and Regulatory Information
Definition of Terms 7-3
Specifications 7-5
Regulatory Information 7-10
Contents-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up the OSA
Setting Up the OSA
Setting Up the OSA
This chapter shows you how to set up your optical spectrum analyzer, connect
power and accessories, and verify general operation. Although the pictures in
this section show an HP 86140A or 86142A optical spectrum analyzer, setting
up other HP 86140-series optical spectrum analyzers is very similar. Refer to
Chapter 6, “Reference” for the following additional information:
costly
• Tips on avoiding
repairs by proper optical connection cleaning tech-
niques.
• List of available options, accessories, and power cords.
• Instructions on returning your instrument to HP for service.
• HP Sales and Service Offices.
1-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up the OSA
Setting Up the OSA
Package contents for HP 86140 series optical spectrum analyzers
❍
❍
❍
Inspect the shipping container for damage.
Inspect the instrument.
Verify that you received the options and accessories you ordered.
Keep the shipping container and cushioning material until you have inspected
the contents of the shipment for completeness and have checked the optical
spectrum analyzer mechanically and electrically.
If anything is missing or defective, contact your nearest Hewlett-Packard Sales
Office. If the shipment was damaged, contact the carrier, then contact the
nearest Hewlett-Packard Sales Office. Keep the shipping materials for the car-
rier’s inspection. The HP Sales Office will arrange for repair or replacement at
Hewlett-Packard’s option without waiting for claim settlement.
Note
The N1031A BenchLink software allows you to upload graphics and trace date to a per-
sonal computer for preparing a report, creating an analysis, or storing the waveforms for
later use.
1-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up the OSA
Setting Up the OSA
You can tilt your instrument upward for easier viewing. On the HP 86140A and
86142A instruments, lift up the front of the instrument, grasp one of the wire
bails under the front corner, and pull it down and forward until it latches into
place. Repeat for the other wire bail. On HP 86143A and 86145A instruments,
pivot the handle to tilt the instrument.
1-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up the OSA
Setting Up the OSA
Although you can operate all instrument functions using only the front-panel
keys and trackball, these accessories make your optical spectrum analyzer
even easier to use! Connect any standard PC-compatible mouse (or other
pointing device), keyboard, or external VGA-compatible display.
C A U T I O N
not
stack other objects on the keyboard; this will cause self-test failures on
Do
power-on.
1-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up the OSA
Setting Up the OSA
You can connect a PCL-language printer (for example, an HP LaserJet) to the
Parallel
instrument’s rear panel
connector. Use a parallel Centronics printer
cable, such as an HP C2950A (2 m) or HP C2951A (3 m).
1-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up the OSA
Setting Up the OSA
The optical spectrum analyzer automatically adjusts for line input voltages in
the range of 100 to 240 VAC. There is no manual selection switch. The line
cord provided is matched by HP to the country of origin of the order. Refer to
“AC Line-Power Cords” on page 6-4.
Line Power Requirements
Power
115 VAC: 110 VA MAX. / 60 WATTS MAX. / 1.1 A MAX.
230 VAC: 150 VA MAX. / 70 WATTS MAX. / 0.6 A MAX.
Voltage
nominal: 115 VAC / 230 VAC
range 115 VAC: 90–132 V
range 230 VAC: 198–254 V
Frequency
nominals: 50 Hz / 60 Hz
range: 47–63 Hz
1-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up the OSA
Setting Up the OSA
• Press the power switch at the lower left-hand corner of the front panel.
After a short initialization period, the display will look similar to the picture on
this page. The instrument is ready to use.
1-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up the OSA
Setting Up the OSA
C A U T I O N
Fiber-optic connectors are easily damaged when connected to dirty or
INPUT
damaged cables and accessories. The HP 86140 series’s front-panel
connector is no exception. When you use improper cleaning and handling
techniques, you risk expensive instrument repairs, damaged cables, and
compromised measurements. Before you connect any fiber-optic cable to the
HP 86140 series optical spectrum analyzer, refer to “Cleaning Connections for
Accurate Measurements” on page 6-10.
1-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2
The Menu Bar 2-10
The Save/Recall menus 2-16
The Systems menus 2-17
The Traces menus 2-18
The Wavelength menus 2-19
Tutorial: Getting Started 2-20
Changing the Printer Paper 2-23
A Quick Tour
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A Quick Tour
A Quick Tour
A Quick Tour
HP 86140A-series optical spectrum analyzers display input light spectra from
600 nm to 1700 nm. To change instrument settings use the softkeys. To dis-
play different softkeys use these items:
• Softkey panel and softkeys
Print, Save/Recall, System,
Application
keys
•
and
• Menu bar
The menu bar or keys can be used to access the same functions. Use the track-
ball or an optional pointing device to make menu and softkey selections.
2-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A Quick Tour
A Quick Tour
All displayed wavelength values show values as measured in a vacuum. This
default setting can be changed to show values as measured in air. See “To
change the default wavelength settings” on page 3-63 for more information.
OPTICAL INPUT
mode fiber
single
The
connector on standard instrument versions uses
. Connecting multi-mode fiber to these connectors results in large
reflections and insertion loss.
Auto Align
To ensure maximum amplitude accuracy, connect an input signal to the instru-
Auto Align
ment and then press
. This starts an automatic alignment procedure
that should be performed whenever the instrument has been:
• moved,
• subjected to large temperature changes, or
• warmed up at the start of each day.
Auto Meas
Auto Meas
Press the key to automatically locate the largest signal present at the
input connector.
Appl’s
Additional software applications can be purchased and installed in your opti-
cal spectrum analyzer. These applications automate and simplify your mea-
surement tasks. Press this key to access your applications.
2-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A Quick Tour
HP 86140/2 Front and Rear Panels
2-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A Quick Tour
HP 86143/5 Front and Rear Panels
2-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A Quick Tour
Optical Spectrum Analyzer Display
2-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A Quick Tour
The Menu Bar
The Menu Bar
The Menu bar includes the File, Measure, Application, and Options drop-down
menus. Each menu selection includes a descriptive label.
(Action)
Indicates the selection will perform an action such as
making a measurement or printing the display.
(Panel)
Indicates the selection will open a softkey panel.
The File menu
The Measure menu
The Applications
menu
The Options menu
2-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A Quick Tour
The Softkey Panels
The Softkey Panels
on each of the OSA functions.
The Bandwidth/Sweep menus 2-14
The Marker menus 2-15
The Save/Recall menus 2-16
The Systems menus 2-17
The Traces menus 2-18
The Wavelength menus 2-19
2-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A Quick Tour
The Softkey Panels
The Applications menus
Appl’s
The Applications (Appl’s) softkeys are accessed by using the front-panel
key or the Applications menu Launch an Installed Application.... selection on
the menu bar.
For a complete description of the applications, refer to the manual that came
with your software.
The Applications menu
2-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A Quick Tour
The Softkey Panels
The Save/Recall menus
The Save/Recall softkeys and setup panels are accessed by using the drop-
Save/Recall
down File menu Save/Recall selection or the front-panel
key. Use
these functions to save, recall and print the measurement results.
The File menu
2-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A Quick Tour
Tutorial: Getting Started
Tutorial: Getting Started
This tutorial will introduce you to the HP 86140 series optical spectrum ana-
lyzer front panel controls. You will perform an auto alignment, perform a peak
search, use a delta marker and print the display.
Instrument setup
A source signal must be present at the input of the optical spectrum analyzer.
In this tutorial a Fabry-Perot laser was used as the source. You can use
EELED
another source or the optional 1310/1550 nm
used, the display will differ from those shown.
To set the OSA to a known state
1
Preset
key to set the instrument to a known state. For a
Press the front-panel
To perform an Auto Align
For maximum amplitude accuracy, perform an automatic alignment whenever
the optical spectrum analyzer has been moved, subjected to large temperature
changes, or following warm-up. See “To perform an Automatic Alignment” on
page 3-2 for more information.
2-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A Quick Tour
Tutorial: Getting Started
2
Connect a fiber from the source to the input connector of the optical spectrum
analyzer. Be sure to follow the good connector practices described in “Cleaning
Connections for Accurate Measurements” on page 6-10.
3
4
Enable the source.
Auto Align
Press the front-panel
key to optimize the detection of the incoming
signal. This takes a few moments to complete.
To perform a peak search
5
Auto Meas
key to locate and zoom-in on the signal. Please
Press the front-panel
wait until the Auto Measure routine is complete.A marker is placed on the peak
of the displayed signal.
Trace with normal marker.
To zoom in on the signal
Span
Press the
softkey and then use the knob, step keys, or numeric keypad to
zoom in on the signal.
2-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A Quick Tour
Tutorial: Getting Started
Using the delta marker
The optical spectrum analyzer has four types of markers; normal markers,
bandwidth markers, delta markers and noise markers. The marker currently
being displayed is a normal marker. In the next step we will use it as a delta
marker.
6
7
8
Marker
Press the front-panel
key.
More Marker Functions....
Press the
Press the
softkey.
Delta Marker
softkey to activate the delta marker and the active
function area.
9
Use the knob, step keys or numeric entry pad to move the delta marker.
The reference marker remains stationary.
10
Trace with delta marker.
Printing the display
11
Print
key to print a copy of the display. The output will be sent to the
Press the
internal or external printer, depending on the printer selected. For information
on selecting the printer, see “To set up a printer” on page 3-44.
2-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A Quick Tour
Changing the Printer Paper
C A U T I O N
C A U T I O N
C A U T I O N
Avoid dropping the coin or screwdriver, used to open the printer door, into the
printer assembly.
Always use HP brand paper to ensure quality printing and long printer life.
Order paper as HP part number 9270-1370.
Never use the printer without printer paper as this can damage the printer
head.
• If the instrument is on, the paper feeder automatically scrolls whenever paper
is inserted into the feeder.
• Lift the paper latch to correct paper alignment problems. The scroll knob al-
lows you to manually advance the paper.
C A U T I O N
To avoid damage caused by losing parts and tools inside the instrument, always
before
turn the instrument off
installing the printer paper.
2-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
The Menus 3-7
The Save/Recall Menus 3-34
The System Menus 3-40
The Traces Menus 3-56
The Wavelength Menus 3-61
To Fill In a Setup Panel 3-65
To use the navigation softkeys 3-66
Using the Optical Spectrum Analyzer
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Optical Spectrum Analyzer
Using the OSA
Using the OSA
In this chapter, there are sections on both the menus and the front-panel keys.
Any of the instrument settings can be changed by using either the front-panel
keys or the menu bar selections. Many of the menu selections and front-panel
keys display a softkey panel. Settings in softkey panels are changed using the
softkeys, data-entry keys, mouse, and trackball.
To perform an Automatic Alignment
For maximum amplitude accuracy, perform an automatic alignment whenever the optical
spectrum analyzer has been moved, subjected to large temperature changes, or follow-
ing warm-up. This function can also be accessed by choosing the Measure menu Auto
Align selection on the menu bar. For a complete description of the Auto Align function,
see the Auto Align section on the next page.
3-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Optical Spectrum Analyzer
Front-Panel Keys
Front-Panel Keys
The optical spectrum analyzer has front-panel keys that perform a function
when pressed.
For maximum amplitude accuracy, perform the automatic alignment when-
ever the optical spectrum analyzer has been moved, subjected to large tem-
perature changes, or following warm-up. This function can also be accessed by
choosing the Measure menu Auto Align selection on the menu bar.
Auto Align
Pressing the
button on the front panel of the OSA performs an auto-
matic alignment of the instrument using the largest signal found in a full span
sweep. This aligns the output of the monochromator with the photodetector
for improved amplitude accuracy. You should use the Auto Align function
whenever the OSA is bumped or physically moved to a new location.
The automatic alignment requires the connection of an external light source.
This can be a broadband or narrowband source. If there is insufficient signal
power, the automatic alignment will not be performed, and an error message
will be reported.
The Auto Align function saves and restores the current instrument state. This
allows the Auto Align function to be used in the middle of a measurement rou-
tine.
span, the alignment is performed at the center wavelength.
To perform an Auto Align function from the remote interface, see the descrip-
tions of the following remote commands:
“CALibration:ALIGn” on page 4-68
“CALibration:ALIGn:MARKer[1|2|3|4]” on page 4-68
3-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Optical Spectrum Analyzer
Front-Panel Keys
Auto Meas
Pressing the
button on the front panel of the OSA performs an auto-
matic measurement of the largest signal found in a full span sweep and places
a marker at the signal peak. Auto measure requires the connection of an
external light source. This can be a broadband or narrowband source. If there
is insufficient signal power, the automatic measurement will not be performed,
and a warning message will be reported. This automatic measurement routine
is normally the best way to adjust sensitivity while maintaining the fastest
sweep rates.
the Auto Measure function can alter the instrument state, we recommend that
before
this operation be performed
a measurement sequence is started.
Using the Auto Measure Setup panel shown below, you can modify the
automeasure span and the vertical scale, tune to the wavelength indicated by
the marker and optimize the sensitivity. See “To change the automeasure
defaults” on page 3-53 for more information.
of the following remote commands:
on page 4-74
“DISPlay[:WINDow[1]]:TRACe:Y[1|2][:SCALe]:AUTO:PDIVision:AUTO
OFF|ON|0|1” on page 4-74
“DISPlay[:WINDow[1]]:TRACe:ALL[:SCALe][:AUTO]:MARKer OFF|ON|0|1”
on page 4-73
“DISPlay[:WINDow[1]]:TRACe:ALL[:SCALe][:AUTO]:OPTimize
OFF|ON|0|1” on page 4-73
3-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Optical Spectrum Analyzer
Front-Panel Keys
Places the optical spectrum analyzer under local control. Enables the front
panel keys after the instrument has been under control with an external com-
puter via HP-IB.
Sets the optical spectrum analyzer to a known state.
Preset
Value
Preset
Value
Function
Start wavelength
Function
Stop wavelength
600 nm
1700 nm
Auto
Wavelength offset
0
Wavelength step size
Resolution bandwidth
Auto
Resolution bandwidth to
span ratio
0.01
Wavelength units
Wavelength limit
Power reference level
nm
On
0 dBm
Medium
Grating order
Power reference level
position
Vacuum
Auto
9
Power scale
Ratio reference level position
Amplitude units
10 dB/div
5
Auto
Auto
On
Ratio reference level
Ratio scale
Ratio unitsa
Video bandwidth
Trans-Z lock
0 dB
10 dB/div
Auto
Auto
Off
Sensitivity
Auto range
Repetitive sweep
Auto chop
On
Off
Sweep time
Gated sweep
Auto
Off
Trigger mode
ADC sync out
Normal
Off
ADC trigger delay
Sweep limit
10 µs
Off
Trace length
1001
100%
Enabled
On
Current source pulse width
Auto zero
User power calibration
Annotation
100 µs
On
Enabled
On
Current source duty cycle
User wavelength calibration
Graticule
Current marker
MKR 1
On
nm
Off
3 dB
Off
Normal marker interpolation
Normal marker units
Peak search threshold
Peak search excursion
Peak search on end-of-sweep Off
Line markers
Off
nm
–90 dBm
3 dB
Bandwidth marker interpolation
Bandwidth marker units
Threshold enable
Pit search excursion
Marker search limit
Off
Marker noise normalization
bandwidth
1 nm
Marker 1–4
Off
Marker 1–4 bandwidth
Off
3-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Optical Spectrum Analyzer
Front-Panel Keys
Preset
Value
Preset
Value
Function
Function
Marker 1–4 bandwidth
–3 dB
Marker 1–4 delta
Off
amplitude
Marker 1–4 noise
Off
Marker 1–4 delta marker
nm
units
Current trace
Trace integration limit
Trace mean limit
Trace data formata
TRB–TRF visibility
TRB–TRF update
TRA–TRF max hold
TRA–TRF trace math
TRA
Off
Off
Trace integration
Trace mean
Trace average count
TRA visibility
Off
Off
100
On
ASCII
Off
Off
Off
Off
TRA update
On
Off
Off
TRA–TRF min hold
TRA–TRF averaging
TRB–TRF data
3-point
dummy trace
Raw trace
3-point
dummy trace
a. Accessible only via the remote interface.
Select this function to print a copy of the display. Using the Printer Setup
menu selection, you can specify the printer as the built-in printer or a printer
that is connected to the rear-panel parallel connector. See “To set up a
printer” on page 3-44 for a complete description of this function.
3-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Optical Spectrum Analyzer
The Amplitude Menus
The Amplitude Menus
The Amplitude menus are accessed using the front-panel
key or the
Measure menu Amplitude selection on the menu bar. If you wish to change
amplitude settings, the following functions and setup panels are available:
Function
See....
Reference Level
Scale/Division
“To change the reference level” on page 3-9
“To change the value of the vertical amplitude scale” on
page 3-9
Display Mode
page 3-10
Sensitivity
“To change the sensitivity” on page 3-10
Peak to Reference Level
“To set the reference level to the peak value” on page 3-11
Note
Normally, the optical spectrum analyzer automatically selects the amplitude units
according to whether the scale is logarithmic (dBm) or linear (watts). See “To change the
default amplitude settings” on page 3-11.
Linear scale
In linear scale, the graticule is scaled in linear units, proportional to the input
power. The bottom of the graticule line represents zero watts. The top of the
graticule represents the reference level. Therefore, with 10 graticule lines,
each division represents 10% of the input signal at the top of the screen.
Logarithmic scale
Logarithmic scales range from 0.01 to 20.00 decibels-per-division. The 10 dB-
per-division scale is the default setting.
3-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Optical Spectrum Analyzer
The Amplitude Menus
Using the Amplitude functions
To change the reference level
1
2
3
Amplitude
Press the front-panel
key.
Reference Level
Press the
softkey.
Use the knob, step keys or numeric entry pad to enter the desired value.
The reference level value is the amplitude level shown at the reference level
position. The reference level position is indicated on the display by a green
REF
line and the
annotation on the display. The default position is one major
watts.
Note
When using the step keys, the increment and decrement values are determined by the
settings of the Scale/Division function. See “To change the value of the vertical ampli-
tude scale” for more information.
Note
If both the left and right vertical scales are displayed, the reference level of the active
trace is adjusted.
To change the value of the vertical amplitude scale
1
2
3
Amplitude
key.
Press the front-panel
Scale/Div
Press the
softkey.
Use the knob, step keys or numeric entry pad to enter the desired value.
Note
This function determines the amount the value increases or decreases when using the
arrow keys to set the reference level. See “To change the reference level” for more
information.
3-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Optical Spectrum Analyzer
The Amplitude Menus
Note
If both the left and right vertical scales are displayed, the scale/division of the active
trace is changed.
To change the display mode between log and linear
1
2
Amplitude
Press the front-panel
key.
Display Mode
Press the
softkey to toggle between Log and Linear data display.
To change the sensitivity
1
2
3
Amplitude
key.
Press the front-panel
Sensitivity
Press the
softkey to toggle between Auto and Manual modes.
Use the knob, step keys or numeric entry pad to enter the desired value.
This key toggles the sensitivity between automatic and manual. The sensitivity
setting indicates the smallest signal amplitude that will be displayed across
the current wavelength range. Increasing sensitivity slows the sweep speed.
An increase in sensitivity may also require a narrower video bandwidth, which
will slow the sweep speed.
Normally, the optical spectrum analyzer selects the greatest sensitivity possi-
ble that does not require amplification changes during the sweep. If you man-
ually increase the sensitivity level, the sweep pauses to allow this change in
gain.
Automatic mode
When in automatic mode, the analyzer selects the greatest sensitivity possible
that does not require amplification changes during the sweep.
Manual mode
When sensitivity is increased manually, the sweep pauses to allow this change
in gain.
3-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Optical Spectrum Analyzer
The Amplitude Menus
Note
The settings for sensitivity, video bandwidth and sweep time interact. If the sensitivity is
set to manual, the video bandwidth and sweep time may be forced to Auto mode. If the
video bandwidth is set to manual, the sensitivity and sweep time may be forced to Auto.
If the sweep speed is set to manual and is set too fast, the OVER SWEEP indicator will
come on in the display area. Since these settings interact, it is recommended that only
one of the settings be changed, whichever setting is most important to the measurement
task being performed.
To set the reference level to the peak value
1
2
Amplitude
Press the front-panel
key.
Peak to REF LEVEL
Press the
softkey.
The system sets the value of the reference level equal to the value of the high-
est point on the active trace.
1
2
3
Amplitude
Press the front-panel
key.
Amplitude Setup....
Press the
softkey.
The Amplitude Setup panel opens. Refer to “To Fill In a Setup Panel” on
page 3-65 for information on changing and selecting items in the setup panel.
The Amplitude Setup panel
3-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Optical Spectrum Analyzer
The Amplitude Menus
Setup panel
selections
Reference Level Position
The value selected for the Reference Level Position determines the position of
the reference level on the graticule. Setting this value to zero divisions places
the reference level on the very bottom of the grid. Setting the reference level
to 10 divisions places the reference level at the top of the grid. Pressing the
Preset
front-panel
key resets the reference level to 9.0 divisions.
Note
When using the knob or step keys, the value will automatically change. When using the
numeric entry pad, a terminator must be selected from the softkey panel.
Amplitude Units
Selecting Auto for amplitude units allows power to be shown in dBm when
using the logarithmic scale and in watts when using the linear scale. Selecting
W forces the readout to be in watts, regardless of the amplitude scaling.
Auto Ranging
The Auto Range function allows the OSA to change the gain of the transim-
pedance amplifier during a sweep. This provides measurements to be made at
the widest dynamic range and at the fastest sweep speed.
Preset
ON
Pressing the front-panel
key turns Auto Ranging
.
Note
It is recommended that Auto Ranging always be turned ON.
Auto Zero
ON
OFF
ON
Turns Auto Zero
and
. Auto Zero
enables the internal amplifiers to
OFF
be zeroed between sweeps. Selecting
disables this feature. Pressing the
Preset
ON
front-panel
key resets this function to
.
Note
Turning Auto Zero OFF allows the instrument to sweep faster, but results in less accu-
racy on low level signals.
3-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Optical Spectrum Analyzer
The Amplitude Menus
Note
The optical spectrum analyzer performs a more complete zeroing when the instrument is
first turned on. You can run this more complete routine anytime by pressing the Zero
Now softkey. Refer to “To zero the instrument” on page 3-50 for more information.
Auto Chop Mode
Enables the spectrum analyzer chop mode. Chop mode increases dynamic
range for long sweep times by subtracting ambient light. Subtracting the ambi-
ent light can improve sensitivity but slow down the sweep speed.
Preset
OFF
Pressing the front-panel
key turns this function
.
Note
Sweep times of 50 msec × the # of trace points, or longer, use a special “chop” mode.
Chop mode increases dynamic range, stabilizes measurements against drift, and reduces
effects of stray light. This special chop mode is enabled by setting the Auto Chop mode
to ON.
Power Calibration
Power Calibration allows you to use amplitude correction factors either from
the factory calibration or from the last successful user calibration. Pressing
Preset
the front-panel
key resets this function to User. If a user calibration has
not been performed, the factory calibration data is used.
User Power Cal Date
The User Power Cal Date displays the date of the last successful user-per-
formed amplitude calibration. See “To perform a power calibration” on
page 3-44 for information on performing an amplitude calibration.
3-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Optical Spectrum Analyzer
The Bandwidth/Sweep Menus
The Bandwidth/Sweep Menus
Band-
The Bandwidth/Sweep softkeys are accessed by using the front-panel
width/Sweep
key or the Measure menu Bandwidth/Sweep selection on the
menu bar. If you wish to change bandwidth or sweep settings, the following
functions and setup panels are available:
Function
See....
Resolution Bandwidth
Video Bandwidth
Sweep Time
Repeat Sweep
Single Sweep
Trigger Mode....
Internal
“To change the video bandwidth” on page 3-15
“To select an external trigger” on page 3-19
“To select the ADC trigger” on page 3-19
“To set the trigger delay” on page 3-20
“To select the synchronous output” on page 3-20
Gated
External
ADC+, ADC–, and ADC AC
Trigger Delay
Synch Out
3-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Optical Spectrum Analyzer
The Bandwidth/Sweep Menus
Using the Bandwidth/Sweep functions
To change the resolution bandwidth
The ability to display two closely spaced signals as two distinct responses is
determined by resolution bandwidth.
1
2
3
4
Bandwidth/Sweep
key.
Press the front-panel
Res BW
Press the
softkey.
Toggle between selecting the resolution bandwidth automatically or manually.
Use the knob, step keys or numeric entry pad to enter the desired value.
The resolution bandwidth can be set to one of the following values:
0.07 (0.06 for the HP 86142A and 86145A), 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1, 2, 5, or 10 nm.
Resolution bandwidth filtering occurs before detection of the light.
In Auto mode, the resolution bandwidth is coupled to the span in a preset
0.01:1 ratio. This means that the optical spectrum analyzer attempts to set a
bandwidth value that is 1% of the span setting. You can alter this behavior by
manually setting the resolution bandwidth.
To change the video bandwidth
1
2
3
4
Bandwidth/Sweep
key.
Press the front-panel
Video BW
Press the
softkey.
Toggle between selecting the video bandwidth automatically or manually.
Use the knob, step keys or numeric entry pad to enter the desired value.
Video bandwidth filtering occurs after detection of the light. In the autocou-
pled mode, the video bandwidth has an extremely wide range. This allows the
optical spectrum analyzer to avoid unnecessary filtering that would reduce the
sweep speed more than required.
Normally, the video bandwidth is coupled to the requested sensitivity. Manu-
ally entering a video bandwidth breaks this coupling. The video bandwidth can
be manually set from 100 mHz to 3 kHz, or the bandwidth of the currently
selected transimpedance amplifier, whichever is less.
3-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Optical Spectrum Analyzer
The Bandwidth/Sweep Menus
The following functions affect video bandwidth:
• Changing the sensitivity value.
• Changing the reference level.
ON
OFF
• Turning autoranging
or
.
The range of video bandwidth available in Auto mode is much greater than can
be set manually from the front panel. A lower video bandwidth value requires
a longer sweep time. Because of the interdependence between the video
or
bandwidth and sensitivity, it is recommended that either the sensitivity
the
video bandwidth be changed, whichever is the most important to the measure-
ment task being performed.
To change the sweep time
1
2
3
4
Bandwidth/Sweep
Press the front-panel
Sweep Time
key.
Press the
softkey.
Toggle between selecting sweep time automatically or manually.
Use the knob, step keys or numeric entry pad to enter the desired value.
The sweep time is the amount of time required for the optical spectrum ana-
lyzer to sweep the current measurement range. The optical spectrum analyzer
automatically selects sweep times based on coupling of the following instru-
ment settings:
• Wavelength span
• Resolution bandwidth
• Video bandwidth
• Sensitivity
• Trace length
• Power level
Coupling of these parameters yields optimum amplitude accuracy. When cou-
pled, the optical spectrum analyzer always uses the fastest sweep possible
while still maintaining the specified accuracy. Coupled, sweep times range
from 50 ms to a maximum value that depends on the number of trace points
used to draw the trace. This relationship is shown in the following equation:
50 ms ≤sweep time ≤(1s)(trace points)
The default number of trace points is 1001, so the maximum sweep time is
normally 100 seconds. When coupling is disabled, the sweep time can be set
from 56.3 ms to a maximum of 1000 seconds. If you change the number of
trace points, the maximum sweep time changes as well.
3-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Optical Spectrum Analyzer
The Bandwidth/Sweep Menus
Manually setting the sweep time turns coupling off.
Note
If the sweep time is set too fast, an OVER SWEEP message appears indicating the dis-
play is no longer calibrated and that trace data may not meet specifications. Increase
the sweep time until the OVER SWEEP message disappears. If the sweep time is set too
slow, measurement times may be excessively long.
To turn repeat sweep on and off
1
2
Bandwidth/Sweep
Press the front-panel
key.
Repeat Sweep
ON
OFF
Press the
softkey to toggle this function
or
.
To perform a single sweep
1
2
Bandwidth/Sweep
Press the front-panel
key.
Single Sweep
Press the
then stop.
softkey. The instrument will perform a single sweep and
When first turned on, the optical spectrum analyzer uses free run triggering
with continuous sweeps. Free run triggering ensures evenly timed sweeps for
a stable display of the current tuning range. Sweeps continuously repeat as
SWEEP
long as trigger conditions are met. The
indicator light on the front panel
of the optical spectrum analyzer is on when the sweep is in progress. The indi-
cator is off between sweeps.
Note
Single sweep mode is especially useful when programming the instrument. Use single
sweeps for the following reasons:
• Insure trace reflects current measurement range settings
• Capture traces before processing them with math commands
• Capture traces before positioning markers
3-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Optical Spectrum Analyzer
The Bandwidth/Sweep Menus
To select the internal trigger
1
2
3
4
Bandwidth/Sweep
key.
Press the front-panel
More BW/Sweep Functions....
Press the
Press the
Press the
softkey.
Trigger Mode....
softkey.
softkey.
Internal
Internal triggering synchronizes the start of the sweep to an internally gener-
ated trigger signal. Internal triggering ensures continuously triggered sweeps
with the shortest delay between sweeps.
To select a gated trigger
1
2
3
4
Bandwidth/Sweep
key.
Press the front-panel
More BW/Sweep Functions....
Press the
Press the
Press the
softkey.
Trigger Mode....
softkey.
Gated
softkey.
In some measurements, the spectrum at a particular time within the modula-
tion period is more important than the average spectrum. Gated triggering can
be used to synchronize the data acquisition portion of the OSA to a gating trig-
ger connected to the rear-panel EXT TRIG IN connector. Gated triggering
requires a TTL-compatible signal with a minimum of 0 Vdc and a maximum of
+5 V.
Gated triggering is used to select data samples containing valid information.
When the gating signal is high, the data sample is accepted. When the gating
signal is low, the data sample is replaced by a data point with a value of
–200 dBm. The sweep time must be long enough to get data for each wave-
length point, or else the Max Hold function must be used to complete a trace
over several sweeps.
3-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Optical Spectrum Analyzer
The Bandwidth/Sweep Menus
To select an external trigger
1
2
3
4
Bandwidth/Sweep
key.
Press the front-panel
More BW/Sweep Functions....
Press the
Press the
Press the
softkey.
Trigger Mode....
softkey.
softkey.
External
External triggering synchronizes the sweep with a signal connected to the
EXT TRIG IN
rear-panel
connector. External triggering requires a TTL-com-
patible signal with a minimum of 0 V and a maximum of +5 V. There is a time
delay between the external trigger signal and the data measurement that is set
by the Trigger Delay value.
To select the ADC trigger
1
2
3
4
Bandwidth/Sweep
key.
Press the front-panel
More BW/Sweep Functions....
Press the
Press the
softkey.
Trigger Mode....
softkey.
ADC+ ADC– ADC AC
softkey.
Press either the
,
, or
The softkeys in the menu select the type of triggering for the analog-to-digital
ADC+
converter in the data acquisition hardware of the OSA. The
softkey trig-
ADC–
gers the OSA on the rising edge of the external trigger signal, and the
ADC AC
softkey triggers it on the falling edge. The
softkey alternately triggers
on the rising and falling edge of the external trigger signal. The amplitude
measured on opposite edges are subtracted and the absolute value of the
result becomes the trace amplitude value. The delay between the external
trigger and the triggering of the analog-to-digital converter is set by the trigger
delay value.
3-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Optical Spectrum Analyzer
The Bandwidth/Sweep Menus
To set the trigger delay
1
2
3
4
5
Bandwidth/Sweep
key.
Press the front-panel
More BW/Sweep Functions....
Press the
Press the
softkey.
Trigger Delay
softkey.
Use the knob, step keys or numeric entry pad to enter the desired value.
Trigger Delay
Use the
softkey to set the delay between the external trigger and
the triggering of the analog-to-digital converter.
The value you select is displayed in the Active Function Area.
To select the synchronous output
1
2
3
Bandwidth/Sweep
Press the front-panel
key.
More BW/Sweep Functions....
Press the
Press the
softkey.
Sync Out
softkey until the desired output is selected.
The synchronous output allows external equipment to receive a sync signal at
LOW
each sample point of the OSA sweep. When
is selected, the signal will be a
TTL LOW
HIGH
TTL HIGH
PULSE
. When
is selected, the signal will be a
. When
is
HIGH
specified, the signal will go
when the external trigger is recognized and
goes low when the analog-to-digital converter is triggered. The width of the
synchronous output pulse is equal to the trigger delay.
3-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Optical Spectrum Analyzer
The Markers Menus
The Markers Menus
The Markers softkeys are accessed using the front-panel
key or the
Measure menu Markers selection on the menu bar. If you wish to change
Function
See....
Active Marker....
Marker Trace....
“To select the active marker” on page 3-23
“To set markers to measure bandwidth” on page 3-24
Marker Bandwidth....
–3 dB, –6 dB, –10 dB, –20 dB
Marker Bandwidth Off
Peak Search
“To perform a peak search” on page 3-25
“To perform a peak search using a marker” on page 3-24
Marker to Center
“To change the center wavelength with a marker” on
page 3-24
Marker to Reference Level
More Marker Functions....
Marker Search Menu....
Search Mode
“To perform a pit search” on page 3-26
Noise Marker
“To set the delta marker function” on page 3-28
“To calculate the total power under a trace” on page 3-28
Delta Marker
Trace Integration
Line Marker Menu....
Wavelength Marker 1
“To set the wavelength line markers” on page 3-28
3-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Optical Spectrum Analyzer
The Markers Menus
Function
See....
Wavelength Marker 2
All Line Markers Off
page 3-29
Advanced Line Marker Functions....
Sweep Limit
Search Limit
Integrate Limit
“To sweep between line markers” on page 3-29
“To search between line markers” on page 3-29
“To integrate between line markers” on page 3-30
“To change the default marker settings” on page 3-30
Marker Setup....
3-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Optical Spectrum Analyzer
The Markers Menus
Using the Marker functions
To select the active marker
1
2
3
Markers
Press the front-panel
key.
Active Marker....
Press the
softkey.
Select the appropriate marker to activate, deactivate, or turn all markers off.
Selecting a marker always places that marker on the currently selected Active
OFF
trace at the center wavelength. Turning a marker
will turn off any marker
ON
function that was on for that particular marker. When the marker is turned
again, all the marker functions for that marker will be off.
To set the active trace
1
2
3
Markers
Press the front-panel
key.
Active Trace....
Press the
softkey.
Select the trace to activate.
or
1
2
3
Traces
Press the front-panel
key.
softkey.
Active Trace....
Press the
Select the trace to activate.
Note
The active trace is designated by a double arrow (>>) on either the right or left side of
the display.
3-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Optical Spectrum Analyzer
The Markers Menus
To set markers to measure bandwidth
1
2
3
Markers
key.
Press the front-panel
Select an active marker.
Place the marker on the peak of the signal to be measured by pressing the
PEAK
SEARCH
softkey.
4
5
Marker BW....
Press the
softkey.
Select a pre-defined bandwidth or use the knob, step keys, or numeric entry
pad to enter the active marker bandwidth amplitude for the active marker.
Marker BW....
If a peak search is not performed, then pressing the
the bandwidth around the currently active marker. If the bandwidth markers
BW not
softkey finds
cannot be placed at the selected value, an error message, such as “
found
” will be displayed.
To perform a peak search using a marker
1
2
3
Markers
key.
Press the front-panel
Select an active marker.
PEAK SEARCH
Press the
softkey.
The active marker is placed on the highest point of the active trace. If no
ON
ON
marker is , Marker #1 will be turned
and placed on the highest point of
the active trace.
To change the center wavelength with a marker
1
2
3
Markers
key.
Press the front-panel
Place a marker on the trace to be centered.
Marker to CENTER
Press the
softkey.
The center wavelength is set to the wavelength value of the active marker.
3-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Optical Spectrum Analyzer
The Markers Menus
To change the reference level with a marker
1
2
Markers
key.
Press the front-panel
Place a marker on the trace at the level you want moved to the reference level
position.
3
Marker to REF LEVEL
softkey.
Press the
The reference level is set to the amplitude of the active marker.
To perform a peak search
1
2
3
Markers
key.
Press the front-panel
Select an active marker.
PEAK SEARCH
Press the
softkey.
or
1
2
3
4
5
6
Markers
key.
Press the front-panel
Select an active marker.
More Marker Functions....
Press the
Press the
Press the
Press the
softkey.
Marker Search Menu....
softkey.
Search Mode....
softkey and toggle to select Peak search mode.
softkey. Select from the following options:
Peak Search
Next Peak Down
Places the marker on the next highest peak from the current marker ampli-
tude. This next highest peak must meet the peak excursion and threshold cri-
OFF
ON
teria. If the specified marker is
, it will be turned , placed at the center
wavelength, and the search for the next maximum will begin from that point.
Next Peak Left
Places the marker on the next peak located at a shorter wavelength than the
current marker wavelength position. This next peak must meet the peak
OFF
excursion and threshold criteria. If the specified marker is
, it will be
ON
turned , placed at the center wavelength, and the search to the left will
begin from that point.
3-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Optical Spectrum Analyzer
The Markers Menus
Next Peak Right
Places the marker on the next peak located at a longer wavelength than the
current marker wavelength position. This next peak must meet the peak
OFF
excursion and threshold criteria. If the specified marker is
, it will be
ON
turned , placed at the center wavelength, and the search to the right will
begin from that point.
Active Marker....
ON
OFF
OFF
Turns a particular marker
or
. Turning a marker
will turn off any
ON
turned
again, all the marker functions for that marker will be off.
Note
For addition information on setting the peak and pit excursion criteria, see “Peak Excur-
sion” and “Pit Excursion” on page 3-32.
To perform a pit search
1
2
3
4
5
6
Markers
key.
Press the front-panel
Select an active marker.
More Marker Functions....
Press the
Press the
Press the
Press the
softkey.
Marker Search Menu....
softkey.
Search Mode....
softkey and toggle to select Pit search mode.
softkey. Select from the following options:
Pit Search
Next Pit Up
Places the marker on the next lowest pit from the current marker amplitude.
This next highest pit must meet the peak excursion and threshold criteria. If
OFF
ON
the specified marker is
, it will be turned , placed at the center wave-
length, and the search for the next minimum will begin from that point.
Next Pit Left
Places the marker on the next pit located at a shorter wavelength than the
current marker wavelength position. This next pit must meet the pit excursion
OFF
ON
and threshold criteria. If the specified marker is
, it will be turned
,
placed at the center wavelength, and the search to the left will begin from that
point.
3-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Optical Spectrum Analyzer
The Markers Menus
Next Pit Right
Places the marker on the next pit located at a longer wavelength than the cur-
rent marker wavelength position. This next pit must meet the pit excursion
OFF
ON
and threshold criteria. If the specified marker is
, it will be turned
,
placed at the center wavelength, and the search to the right will begin from
that point.
Active Marker....
ON
OFF
OFF
Turns a particular marker
or
. Turning a marker
will turn off any
ON
turned
again, all the marker functions for that marker will be off.
Note
For addition information on setting the peak and pit excursion criteria, see “Peak Excur-
sion” and “Pit Excursion” on page 3-32.
To set the noise marker function
1
2
3
4
5
Markers
key.
Press the front-panel
Select an active marker.
More Marker Functions....
Press the
Press the
softkey.
Noise Marker
softkey.
ON
OFF
Toggle the noise marker
or
.
The noise marker measures the spectral power density at the position of the
active marker. The measurement is referenced to a 0.1 nm or 1 nm resolution
bandwidth. The reference bandwidth used to normalize the noise is selected
on the Marker setup panel. See “To change the default marker settings” on
page 3-30 for additional information.
3-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Optical Spectrum Analyzer
The Markers Menus
To set the delta marker function
1
Place the marker to be used as a reference on the desired trace and at the
desired wavelength.
2
3
4
Markers
Press the front-panel
key.
More Marker Functions....
Press the
Press the
softkey.
Delta Marker
softkey.
To fix the position of the reference marker and activate the delta marker, tog-
ON
gle the delta marker . Use the front-panel knob or keypad to move the delta
ON
marker to the desired location. If the delta function is turned
and no
ON
marker is active, Marker #1 will be turned , placed at the center wavelength,
ON
and the delta function will be turned
.
To calculate the total power under a trace
1
2
3
Markers
Press the front-panel
key.
softkey.
softkey to turn trace integration on.
More Marker Functions....
Press the
Trace Integ
Use the
Only one total power calculation can be turned on at a time. For example, if a
total power calculation is being performed on trace A, turning a total power
ON
OFF
calculation for trace B
will turn the calculation for trace A
.
To set the wavelength line markers
1
2
3
4
5
Markers
Press the front-panel
key.
More Marker Functions....
Press the
Press the
Press the
softkey.
softkey.
Wavelength Marker 1 Wavelength Marker 2
Line Marker Menu....
or
softkey.
Position the line markers using the knob, step keys, or numeric entry pad.
Line markers let you perform sweeps, searches and integrations over a
reduced section of the selected wavelength range. Wavelength Marker 1 is
always to the left of Wavelength Marker 2.
3-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Optical Spectrum Analyzer
The Markers Menus
To turn off all line makers and line marker functions
1
2
3
4
Markers
Press the front-panel
key.
More Marker Functions....
Press the
Press the
Press the
softkey.
softkey.
softkey.
Line Marker Menu....
Line Markers Off
To sweep between line markers
1
2
3
4
Markers
Press the front-panel
key.
More Marker Functions....
Press the
Press the
softkey.
softkey.
Line Marker Menu....
Select and set Wavelength Marker 1 and 2 to the desired wavelength sweep
limits.
5
6
Advanced Line Mkr Functions....
Press the
Press the
softkey.
softkey to toggle this function
ON
Sweep Limit
ON
OFF
or
.
When the sweep limit is , the instrument will only sweep between Wave-
length Marker 1 and Wavelength Marker 2.
To search between line markers
1
2
3
4
Markers
Press the front-panel
key.
More Marker Functions....
Press the
Press the
softkey.
softkey.
Line Marker Menu....
Select and set Wavelength Marker 1 and 2 to the desired wavelength search
limits.
5
6
Advanced Line Mkr Functions....
Press the
Press the
softkey.
softkey to toggle this function
ON
Search Limit
ON
OFF
or
.
When the search limit is , all the marker peak/pit searches will be between
Wavelength Marker 1 and Wavelength Marker 2.
3-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Optical Spectrum Analyzer
The Markers Menus
To integrate between line markers
1
2
3
4
5
6
Markers
Press the front-panel
key.
More Marker Functions....
Press the
Press the
softkey.
softkey.
Line Marker Menu....
Select and set Wavelength Marker 1 and 2 to the desired integration limits.
dvanced Line Mkr Functions
Press the A
.... softkey.
softkey to toggle this function
ON
Integrate Limit
ON
OFF
Press the
or
.
Turning the integration limit
will calculate the power between Wavelength
ON
Marker 1 and Wavelength Marker 2 when the Trace Integration function in
.
See “To calculate the total power under a trace” on page 3-28.
Note
Although there is a single range controlling the total power integration, the marker
search range, and the wavelength sweep range, there are three independent state set-
tings for limiting the total power integration, the marker search, and the wavelength
sweep to the range.
To change the default marker settings
1
2
3
4
Markers
Press the front-panel
key.
More Marker Functions....
Press the
Press the
softkey.
Marker Setup....
softkey.
The Marker Setup panel opens. Refer to “To Fill In a Setup Panel” on page 3-65
for information on changing and selecting items in the setup panel.
3-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Optical Spectrum Analyzer
The Markers Menus
The Marker Setup panel
Setup panel
selections
Normal Marker Units
Sets the X-axis readout for frequency or wavelength when the instrument is in
a non-zero span. This setting controls only the normal marker X-axis and the
delta reference readout. This setting controls all four normal markers. The
bandwidth and delta offset markers have their own settings.
Bandwidth Marker Units
Sets the bandwidth marker X-axis readout for frequency or wavelength when
the instrument is in a non-zero span. The delta markers have their own set-
ting. This setting controls all four bandwidth markers.
Delta Marker Units
Sets the delta marker X-axis readout for frequency or wavelength when the
instrument is in a non-zero span. The bandwidth markers have their own set-
ting. This setting controls all four delta markers.
Normal/Delta Marker Interpolation
ON
OFF
Turns the normal/delta marker interpolation
or
. When interpolation is
ON
, the normal/delta markers will be placed at the exact wavelength or fre-
quency value selected if it is within the trace range. The marker will linearly
OFF
interpolate between two trace data points. The default state is
.
This setting controls the interpolation state for all four markers when in the
normal or delta mode.
3-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Optical Spectrum Analyzer
The Markers Menus
Bandwidth Marker Interpolation
ON
OFF
Turns the bandwidth marker interpolation
or
. When interpolation is
ON
, the bandwidth markers will be placed at the exact number of dB (NDB)
from the normal marker if within the trace range. The position of the marker
will be linearly interpolated between two trace data points. The default state is
ON
OFF
. If interpolate is
, for negative NDB values, the bandwidth markers will
be at values closest to and more negative than the NDB value. For positive
NDB values, the bandwidth markers will be at values closest to and more posi-
tive than the NDB values. This will typically result in a wider bandwidth mea-
surement.
Peak Excursion
Sets the peak excursion value for the marker search routines.
Peak excursion criteria
The peak excursion value is used to determine whether or not a local maxi-
mum in the trace is to be considered a peak. To qualify as a peak, both sides of
the local maximum must fall by at least the peak excursion value.
Pit Excursion
Sets the pit excursion value for the marker search routines.
Pit excursion criteria
The pit excursion value is used to determine whether or not a local minimum
in the trace is to be considered a pit. To qualify as a pit, both sides of the local
minimum must rise by at least the pit excursion value.
3-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Optical Spectrum Analyzer
The Markers Menus
Use Marker Search Threshold
This limits the marker search function to data points above the selected
threshold level.
Marker Search Threshold Value
Selects the amplitude threshold value used for limiting the marker search
ON
function. When Marker Search Threshold is , a dotted line is shown on the
display at the threshold level.
Noise Marker Reference Bandwidth
Sets the normalization bandwidth for the noise marker. There are two allow-
able settings: 1 nm and 0.1 nm.
Note
Changing this value will change the value of the noise marker by 10 dB.
Peak Search at End of Each Sweep
Finds the peak value of the trace and moves the marker to the peak at the end
of each sweep. This function operates on the active marker. This function
operates on normal, delta, bandwidth and noise markers.
3-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Optical Spectrum Analyzer
The Save/Recall Menus
The Save/Recall Menus
The Save/Recall softkeys are accessed by using the front-panel
key
or the File menu Save/Recall selection on the menu bar. If you wish to change
save or recall settings, the following functions are available:
Function
See....
Save Menu....
Recall Menu....
“To recall measurement and trace data” on page 3-37
Delete Menu....
Format Floppy Disk....
Backup/Restore Menu....
Backup Internal Memory
Restore Internal Memory
Fast Save
“To backup or restore the internal memory” on page 3-39
“To backup or restore the internal memory” on page 3-39
“To save in Fast Save mode” on page 3-39
Fast Recall
“To recall in Fast Recall mode” on page 3-39
3-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Optical Spectrum Analyzer
The Save/Recall Menus
Using the Save/Recall functions
To save measurement and trace data
1
2
3
Save/Recall
Press the front-panel
Save Menu....
key.
Press the
softkey.
The Save Setup panel opens. Refer to “To Fill In a Setup Panel” on page 3-65
for information on changing and selecting items in the setup panel.
The Save Setup panel
Setup panel
selections
Save
.dat
Saves the measurement data in a binary format (
file). This includes the
traces and all measurement conditions. When the file is recalled, the instru-
ment state will be set to the same state as when the file was saved. The
.csv
Trace(s) Only option creates an ASCII (
trace data will be displayed
) file. When the file is recalled, the
Refer to
under the current instrument settings.
“To display the OSA State information panel” on page 3-47 for a description of
the OSA state information.
Save Traces
Selects the traces to be saved.
Save Graphics
Saves graphic data when selected. The graphic data is stored in Computer
Graphics Metafile (CGM) format. This is a vector graphics format that
describes pictures and graphical elements in geometric terms. This selection
is valid only when saving to the floppy drive.
3-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Optical Spectrum Analyzer
The Save/Recall Menus
Save to
Selects saving data to a floppy disk or to internal memory.
File Name
Selects manual or automatic mode for choosing a file name.
4
Choose File to Save
softkey.
When you are satisfied with your selections, press the
The Filename Menu setup panel opens.
The Filename Menu setup panel
To enter a filename using the arrow keys
1
⇑
⇓
→
←
Use the front-panel step keys ( and ) and the arrow softkeys ( and ) to
highlight each letter of the filename.
2
3
4
5
Select
softkey.
When the desired letter or function is selected, press the
Select the BackSpace function to delete individual letters.
Select the Clear Line function to delete the entire filename.
SAVE FILE
When you finish entering the filename, press the
softkey.
To enter a filename using a trackball or mouse
1
Use the pointing device to place the cursor on a letter of the filename. Click on
the character to select it.
2
3
4
Click the BackSpace function to delete individual letters.
Click the Clear Line function to delete the entire filename.
SAVE FILE
When you finish entering the filename, click the
softkey.
3-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Optical Spectrum Analyzer
The Save/Recall Menus
To recall measurement and trace data
1
2
3
Save/Recall
key.
Press the front-panel
Recall Menu....
Press the
softkey.
The Recall Setup panel opens.
The Recall Menu setup panel
Setup panel
selections
Recall
Selects whether a measurement or trace will be recalled.
Recall From
Selects whether to recall from a floppy disk or from internal memory.
4
Choose File to Recall
When you are satisfied with your selections, press the
softkey. The Catalog panel opens. See “To select a file from the catalog” on
page 3-37.
To select a file from the catalog
1
2
3
4
Save/Recall
key.
Press the front-panel
Recall Menu.... Delete Menu....
softkey.
Press the
Press the
or
Choose File to Recall Choose File to Delete
or
softkey.
Make the desired selections on the setup panel. Refer to “To Fill In a Setup
Panel” on page 3-65 for information on changing and selecting items in the
setup panel.
5
Enter
. The Catalog panel
When you are satisfied with your selections, press
opens.
3-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Optical Spectrum Analyzer
The Save/Recall Menus
The Catalog setup panel
6
Use the arrow keys to highlight the next five previous file softkeys, or click on
Enter
the desired filename using a trackball or mouse. Press
the selected file.
to recall or delete
To delete a file from internal memory or a floppy disk
1
2
Save/Recall
key.
Press the front-panel
Delete Menu....
Press the
softkey.
The Delete Setup panel
Setup panel
selections
Delete File From:
Selects whether to delete from a floppy disk or from internal memory.
Choose File to Delete
Press the
softkey to open the Catalog window. See “To
select a file from the catalog” on page 3-37 for information on selecting the file
to delete.
3-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Optical Spectrum Analyzer
The Save/Recall Menus
To format a floppy disk
1
2
3
Save/Recall
key.
Press the front-panel
Format Floppy Disk....
Press the
Press the
softkey.
Format
Cancel
softkey
softkey to format the 3.5 floppy disk. Press the
to stop the format action and return to the previous screen.
To backup or restore the internal memory
1
2
Save/Recall
key.
Press the front-panel
Backup/Restore Menu....
Press the
softkey.
Softkey panel
selections
Backup Internal Memory
An OSA Backup Utility screen appears asking you to insert a formatted floppy
disk in the external drive.
Restore Internal Memory
An OSA Restore Utility screen appears. This operation will remove all files
from internal memory and replace them with files from backup floppy disks.
To save in Fast Save mode
1
2
3
Save/Recall
key.
Press the front-panel
Fast SAVE
Press the
softkey.
The instrument saves the measurement to internal memory.
To recall in Fast Recall mode
1
2
3
Save/Recall
Press the front-panel
Fast RECALL
key.
Press the
softkey.
The instrument recalls the measurement saved previously by the Fast Save
function.
3-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Optical Spectrum Analyzer
The System Menus
The System Menus
System
The System softkeys are accessed using the front-panel
key or the
Options menu System selection on the menu bar. If you wish to change system
settings, the front-panel System key provides access to the following functions
and setup panels:
Function
See....
Help....
Show Critical Errors....
warnings” on page 3-42
Show BW Errors....
Show Warnings....
Show Notices....
Revision....
warnings” on page 3-42
“To display notices, bandwidth errors, critical errors and
“To display the firmware revision” on page 3-42
Set Title....
Display Setup....
Printer Setup....
Calibration....
Power Cal Setup....
Wavelength Cal Setup....
Move Active Area
“To perform a power calibration” on page 3-44
“To perform a wavelength calibration” on page 3-45
“To move the active function area” on page 3-47
3-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Optical Spectrum Analyzer
The System Menus
Function
See....
More System Functions....
OSA State....
Active Panel
Set Time/Date....
Service Menu....
Power On State
Factory Preset (IP)
Firmware Upgrade
Adv Service Functions....
Zero Now
“To zero the instrument” on page 3-50
Grating Order
Wavelength Limit
More Adv Service
Functions....
TransZ 2-3 Lock
Multi-Point Align
OSA Extended
State....
“To display the OSA Extended State information panel” on
page 3-53
Auto Measure Setup....
Remote Setup....
“To change the automeasure defaults” on page 3-53
“To set the HP-IB address” on page 3-55
3-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Optical Spectrum Analyzer
The System Menus
Using the System functions
To display notices, bandwidth errors, critical errors and warnings
Note
The Show Notices...., Show BW Errors...., Show Critical Errors...., and Show Warnings....
functions are only available if a notice, bandwidth error, critical error, or warning has
been generated by the system. If no notices, bandwidth errors, critical errors, or warn-
ings have been generated, these functions will be grayed out.
1
2
3
System
key.
Press the front-panel
Help....
Press the
softkey.
how Notices.... Show BW Errors.... Show Critical Errors.... Show
Press the S
,
,
or
Warnings....
softkey. A window opens displaying the notice, bandwidth error,
critical error or warning. You can print the queue, clear the queue, or page up
and down to view the information.
To display the firmware revision
1
2
3
System
key.
Press the front-panel
Help....
Press the
softkey.
Revision....
Press the
softkey. A display appears showing the firmware revision
information.
To add a title to the display
1
2
System
Press the front-panel
key.
Set Title....
Press the
softkey. The Title Setup panel appears.
3-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Optical Spectrum Analyzer
The System Menus
The Title Setup panel
Refer to “To Fill In a Setup Panel” on page 3-65 for information on changing
and selecting items in the setup panel.
To change the display setup
1
2
System
key.
Press the front-panel
Display Setup....
Press the
softkey. The Display Setup panel appears.
The Display Setup panel
Setup panel
selections
HP Logo
ON
When this function is , the HP logo is shown on the display and printouts.
Date/Time
ON
OFF
Turns the date and time
or
on the display.
Title
ON
OFF
Turns the title
or
on the display.
3-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Optical Spectrum Analyzer
The System Menus
Active Function Area Assist
ON
When this function is , the function set in the Active Function Area is auto-
matically set to the first, or top, softkey function. For example, when you
Bandwidth/Sweep
press the front-panel
key, the Active Function Area Assist
function will set the Active Function Area to resolution bandwidth. This
means you can immediately enter the desired resolution bandwidth. There is
Res BW
no need to press the
softkey.
To set up a printer
1
2
System
Press the front-panel
key.
Printer Setup....
Press the
softkey. The Printer Setup panel appears.
The Printer Setup panel
Setup panel
selections
Printer Location
Selects either the internal printer or an external printer as the print destina-
tion.
To perform a power calibration
1
2
3
System
Press the front-panel
key.
softkey.
Power Cal Setup....
Calibration....
Press the
Press the
softkey. The Power Calibration Setup panel appears.
The Power Calibration setup panel
3-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Optical Spectrum Analyzer
The System Menus
Setup panel
selections
Factory Power Cal Date
Shows the date of the last factory-performed power calibration.
User Power Cal Date
Shows the date of the last successful user-performed power calibration.
Set Calibration Power
This is the exact amplitude of the calibration source that will be used for the
next power calibration. The power entered must be within +10 dB and –3 dB
of the amplitude measured using the factory calibration.
Set Calibration Wavelength
This is the approximate wavelength of the calibration source that will be used
for the next user power calibration. The wavelength entered must be within
2.5 nm of the wavelength measured using the factory calibration.
4
5
Enter the power and wavelength of the calibration signal.
Perform Calibration....
Press the
softkey.
6
Execute Calibration
.
Follow the on-screen instructions and then press
To perform a wavelength calibration
1
2
3
System
Press the front-panel
key.
softkey.
Wavelength Cal Setup....
Calibration....
Press the
Press the
softkey. The Wavelength Calibration Setup
panel appears.
3-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Optical Spectrum Analyzer
The System Menus
The Wavelength Calibration setup panel
Setup panel
selections
Factory Wavelength Cal Date
Shows the date of the last factory-performed wavelength calibration.
User Wavelength Cal Date
Shows the date of the last successful user-performed wavelength calibration.
Signal Source
Select either an external single wavelength signal source or the internal cali-
brator as the wavelength calibration source.
Wavelength Referenced In (for external calibration source only)
Selects air or vacuum for the calibration. If the internal calibrator is selected,
this selection will not be available.
Set Calibration Wavelength (for external calibration source only)
This is the exact wavelength of the calibration source that will be used for the
next user wavelength calibration. The wavelength entered must be within
2.5 nm of the wavelength measured using the factory calibration. If the inter-
nal calibrator is selected, this selection will not be available.
4
If you are using an external calibration source, enter the signal source and
wavelength of the calibration signal and whether the calibration is referenced
in air or vacuum. If you are using an internal calibration source, continue with
Step 5.
3-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Optical Spectrum Analyzer
The System Menus
5
Perform Calibration....
softkey.
Press the
6
Execute Calibration
.
Follow the on-screen instructions and then press
To move the active function area
1
2
System
Press the front-panel
key.
softkey. Each press of the softkey moves the active
function area to one of eight on-screen locations.
Move Active Area
Press the
To display the OSA State information panel
1
2
3
4
System
Press the front-panel
key.
More System Functions....
Press the
Press the
softkey.
OSA State....
softkey.
The OSA State Information display panel opens and can be printed.
The OSA State information panel
3-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Optical Spectrum Analyzer
The System Menus
To display the Active Function Area
1
2
3
System
Press the front-panel
key.
More System Functions....
Press the
Press the
softkey.
Active Panel
softkey to toggle the display of the Active Function Area
ON
OFF
or
.
To change the time and date
NO T E
Changing the time, date, or time zone causes the instrument to reboot.
1
2
3
System
Press the front-panel
key.
More System Functions....
Press the
Press the
softkey.
Set Time/Date....
softkey. The Time/Date Setup panel appears.
4
5
Use the navigation keys to set the date, time and time zone that are correct for
your location.
Set Time/Date
Press the
softkey when you are satisfied with your selections.
To select the power-on state
1
2
3
4
System
Press the front-panel
key.
More System Functions....
Press the
Press the
Press the
softkey.
Service Menu....
Power On State
softkey.
softkey. Toggle to select IP or Last.
3-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Optical Spectrum Analyzer
The System Menus
Preset
The IP function is the same as the front-panel
key. For a complete list of
the Preset conditions, see page 3-5. When Last is selected the instrument will
power-on in the same state it was in when last powered-off.
To perform a factory preset (IP)
1
2
3
4
System
Press the front-panel
key.
More System Functions....
Press the
Press the
Press the
softkey.
Service Menu....
softkey.
Factory Preset (IP)
softkey.
The factory preset function restarts the instrument and sets it to the same
Preset
states as the front-panel
key. See “SYSTem:PRESet” on page 4-93 for a
complete list of the preset conditions. In addition, it also sets the following
functions.
Function
Factory Preset Value
Wavelength functions
User wavelength calibration date
None
User wavelength calibration source
None
User wavelength calibration wavelength
Wavelength for next wavelength calibration
Wavelength for next amplitude calibration
User wavelength calibration correction
0 nm
1150 nm
1150 nm
Zero
Amplitude functions
User amplitude calibration date
None
User amplitude calibration source
User amplitude calibration wavelength
User amplitude calibration amplitude
Amplitude for next amplitude calibration
User amplitude calibration correction
None
0 nm
–300 dBm
0 dBm
Zero
Auto Measure functions
Auto-Measure optimize sensitivity
Auto-Measure auto span
Off
On
Auto-Measure Manual span
Auto-Measure dB/div auto
10 nm
On
Auto-Measure manual dB/division
10 dB/division
3-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Optical Spectrum Analyzer
The System Menus
Function
Factory Preset Value
Miscellaneous functions
Power-on in last state
HP-IB address
Off
23
Time display
On
HP logo display
On
Active function area assist
Active function area location
Printer interface
On
Upper right
Internal
To upgrade the firmware
To upgrade the firmware you must have the firmware upgrade disk set from
HP.
1
2
3
4
5
System
Press the front-panel
key.
More System Functions
Press the
Press the
Press the
.... softkey.
.... softkey.
Firmware Upgrade
Service Menu
.... softkey.
You are prompted for each disk in the firmware upgrade set. When the last disk
has been copied, the instrument will finish the installation process and restart.
To zero the instrument
1
2
3
4
5
System
Press the front-panel
key.
More System Functions....
Press the
Press the
Press the
Press the
softkey.
softkey.
Service Menu....
softkey.
Adv Service Functions....
Zero Now
softkey.
The Zero Now function causes the auto zero function to run immediately. This
allows you to manually zero the instrument when the Auto Zero function is off.
The dark current of the photodetector is measured one time, and then the
resulting correction is applied to all subsequent measurements, for improved
amplitude accuracy.
3-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Optical Spectrum Analyzer
The System Menus
Note
The optical spectrum analyzer compensates for temperature-related current drift
between each sweep. Although this “zeroing” increases amplitude accuracy, it increases
the time between sweeps. If amplitude accuracy is not critical to your measurement, you
can turn off zeroing. Refer to “Auto Zero” on page 3-12 for additional information.
The optical spectrum analyzer performs a more complete zeroing when the instrument is
first turned on. You can run this more complete routine anytime by pressing the ZERO
NOW softkey.
To set the grating order mode
1
2
3
4
5
6
System
Press the front-panel
key.
More System Functions....
Press the
Press the
Press the
Press the
softkey.
softkey.
Service Menu....
softkey.
Adv Service Functions....
Grating Order
softkey.
Toggle between 1 and AUTO.
the Automatic setting. The Automatic mode selects 2nd order mode if the stop
wavelength is less than 900 nm. The 2nd order grating mode provides a slightly
higher measurement sensitivity. Note that the 10 nm resolution bandwidth is
not available when using the 2nd order grating mode. The grating order is
listed in the OSA State Information. See “To display the OSA State information
panel” on page 3-47 for more information.
To set the wavelength limit
1
2
3
4
System
Press the front-panel
key.
More System Functions....
Press the
Press the
Press the
softkey.
softkey.
Service Menu....
softkey.
Adv Service Functions....
3-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Optical Spectrum Analyzer
The System Menus
5
Wavelength Limit
ON
Press the
softkey. Toggle
to limit the span to the specified
OFF
range of 600 to 1700 nm. When this function is
, the start wavelength of the
OSA can be tuned down to 350 nm, and the stop wavelength can be tuned up
to 2000 nm.
Note
The performance of the OSA is not specified and the amplitude is not calibrated outside
the 600–1700 nm range.
To set the TransZ 2 - 3 Lock
1
2
3
4
5
6
System
Press the front-panel
key.
More System Functions....
Press the
Press the
Press the
Press the
Press the
softkey.
softkey.
Service Menu....
softkey.
Adv Service Functions....
More Adv Service Menu....
softkey.
TransZ 2 - 3 Lock
softkey.
ON
Setting the TransZ 2-3 Lock to
prohibits the instrument from using a tran-
simpedance gain higher than 10k ohms. This ensures that there is sufficient
video bandwidth for making accurate pulsed measurements. This is useful for
OFF
EDFA pulsed testing. The Preset state for TransZ 2-3 Lock is
.
To set multi-point alignment
1
2
3
4
5
6
System
key.
Press the front-panel
More System Functions
Press the
Press the
Press the
Press the
Press the
.... softkey.
Service Menu
.... softkey.
Adv Service Functions
.... softkey.
More Adv Service Menu
.... softkey.
softkey.
Multi-Point Align
Multi-Point Align is an advanced service function that requires a broadband
white light source. This function is to be used by HP service personnel.
3-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Optical Spectrum Analyzer
The System Menus
To display the OSA Extended State information panel
1
2
3
4
5
6
System
Press the front-panel
key.
More System Functions....
Press the
Press the
Press the
Press the
Press the
softkey.
softkey.
Service Menu....
softkey.
Adv Service Functions....
More Adv Service Menu....
softkey.
softkey. The OSA Extended State Information
OSA Extended State....
panel is displayed and can be printed.
The OSA Extended State function provides information useful to HP service
personnel.
To change the automeasure defaults
1
2
3
System
Press the front-panel
key.
More System Functions....
Press the
Press the
softkey.
Auto Measure Setup....
softkey. The Automeasure Setup panel appears.
3-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Optical Spectrum Analyzer
The System Menus
4
Use the arrow keys or the numeric entry pad to set the wavelength span
manually or automatically. Refer to “To Fill In a Setup Panel” on page 3-65 for
information on changing and selecting items in the setup panel.
Setup panel
selections
Span
This function selects the wavelength span for viewing the signal located by the
auto measure function. If Auto is specified, the span is set wide enough to dis-
play most of the signal. If a particular span is desired, deselect Auto and put
the desired span in the nm dialog box. The default selection for Span is Auto.
Note
If the span is set too narrow, the auto measure operation may not complete successfully.
If this happens a warning message is displayed.
Scale/Div
The dB/div selection sets the vertical scale to be used after performing the
auto measure function. If Auto is specified, the measurement function sets the
vertical scale to a value based on the dynamic range of the signal. If a particu-
lar vertical scale is desired, deselect Auto and put the desired dB/div in the dB
dialog box. The default selection for dB/div is Auto.
AutoMeas at Marker
ON
Selecting the
state for AutoMeas at Marker causes the auto measure func-
tion to perform its operation at the wavelength of the active marker. This
allows you to measure a signal other than the largest one found in a full span
OFF
sweep. The default selection for Automeasure at Marker is
.
Optimize Sensitivity
ON
Selecting the
state for Optimize Sensitivity causes the auto measure func-
tion to set the sensitivity so the resulting measurement has a minimal amount
of noise. It does this by finding the minimum in the measurement trace and
comparing this value to the known sensitivity of the instrument at that wave-
length. Sensitivity is then reduced until the signal is close to this minimum
sensitivity or the sweep time becomes too long. The Optimize Sensitivity func-
tion is useful when viewing high dynamic range signals. The drawback to turn-
ON
ing this function
is that it generally requires a longer sweep time to get
OFF
better sensitivity. The default selection for Optimize Sensitivity: is
.
3-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Optical Spectrum Analyzer
The System Menus
Note
None of the Automeasure Setup parameters are affected by the front-panel Preset key.
They are not saved as part of the measurement setup.
To set the HP-IB address
1
2
3
4
System
Press the front-panel
key.
More System Functions....
Press the
Press the
softkey.
Remote Setup....
softkey. The Remote Setup panel appears.
The Current HPIB Address information shows the HP-IB address currently
being used. To change the address, use the numerical entry pad or knob to
Defaults
change the New HPIB Address information. Press the
softkey to reset
the address to factory preset defaults. Refer to “To Fill In a Setup Panel” on
page 3-65 for information on changing and selecting items in the setup panel.
5
Set HPIB Address
softkey if changes were made.
Press the
The Remote Setup panel
Setup panel
selections
Current HPIB Address
Shows the HP-IB address currently being used.
New HPIB Address
Enter the new HP-IB address in the text box using the number keys or knob.
3-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Optical Spectrum Analyzer
The Traces Menus
The Traces Menus
Traces
The Traces softkeys are accessed by using the front-panel
key or the
settings, the front-panel Traces key provides access to the following functions
and setup panels:
Function
See....
Active Trace....
“To set the active trace” on page 3-57
Update <trace>
View <trace>
Hold <trace>....
Trace Math....
Default Math Trace C....
Default Math Trace F....
Exchange Menu....
page 3-59
All Math Off
Averaging....
“To turn all math functions off” on page 3-59
“To set up averaging” on page 3-60
Trace Setup....
“To set the number of points in a sweep” on page 3-60
3-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Optical Spectrum Analyzer
The Traces Menus
Using the Traces functions
To set the active trace
1
2
3
Traces
Press the front-panel
key.
Active Trace....
Press the
softkey.
Use the arrow keys or knob to select the active trace.
or
1
2
3
Markers
Press the front-panel
key.
Active Trace....
Press the
softkey.
Use the arrow keys or knob to select the active trace.
To put a marker on a trace, or to make changes to a trace, it must be the active
trace. The active trace is designated by the double-arrows at either the left or
right edge of the graticule.
To set the update function for the trace
1
2
3
4
Traces
key.
Press the front-panel
Select the trace to be changed.
Update <trace>
Press the
softkey.
ON
OFF
Use the arrow keys or knob to select
or
.
ON
When , the trace always accepts data when data is available.
OFF
When
, the trace will not be updated.
To set the display function for the trace
1
2
3
Traces
key.
Press the front-panel
Select the trace to be changed.
View <trace>
ON
OFF
Press the
softkey to turn the display of the selected trace
or
.
3-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Optical Spectrum Analyzer
The Traces Menus
To set the Hold.... function
1
2
Traces
key.
Press the front-panel
Hold <trace>....
Press the
softkey to select None, Min or Max.
None turns the Hold function off.
The maximum hold function compares the current amplitude value of each
point on a trace in the current sweep to the corresponding point detected dur-
ing the previous sweep, then displays the maximum value.
The minimum hold function compares the current amplitude value of each
point on a trace in the current sweep to the corresponding point detected dur-
ing the previous sweep, then displays the minimum value.
Max/Min Reset
Pressing the
softkey resets the hold function to the last acquired
trace. Subsequent traces are accumulated in the hold sequence.
To set the trace math for trace C
1
2
3
Traces
Press the front-panel
key.
softkey.
Default Math Trace C....
Trace Math....
Press the
Press the
softkey to define the math expression to be used
when the math operations are turned on. The result is placed in Trace C.
Select the appropriate softkey to define the math expression.
C=ALOG–B, C=ALOG+B, C=ALIN–B, C=ALIN+B
4
ON
Defines the math expression to be used and turns the math operation . The
math operation is performed in linear units.
Trace C Math Off
Determines whether or not math processing is performed.
3-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Optical Spectrum Analyzer
The Traces Menus
To set the trace math for trace F
1
2
3
4
Traces
Press the front-panel
key.
softkey.
Default Math Trace F....
Trace Math....
Press the
Press the
softkey. The result is placed in trace F.
Select the appropriate softkey to define the math expression.
F=CLOG–D
ON
Defines the math expression to be used and turns the math operation . The
math operation is performed in linear units.
Trace F Math Off
Determines whether or not math processing is done.
To exchange both the X-axis and Y-axis data of two traces
1
2
3
4
Traces
Press the front-panel
key.
softkey.
Exchange Menu....
Trace Math....
Press the
Press the
softkey.
Select the two traces to be exchanged for both the X- and Y-axis.
To turn all math functions off
1
2
3
Traces
key.
Press the front-panel
Trace Math....
Press the
Press the
softkey.
softkey.
All Math Off
3-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Optical Spectrum Analyzer
The Traces Menus
To set up averaging
1
Traces
Press the front-panel
key.
Averaging....
softkey.
2
3
Press the
ON
OFF
Toggle averaging
or
. If averaging is on, softkeys appear to select the
number of measurements to be averaged.
Use the keys to select the number of measurements to be averaged. When the
number of measurements taken is less than the count, the following formula is
used to calculate the data:
sum of all measurements
AVG = ---------------------------------------------------------------------
number of measurements
If the number of measurements is greater than or equal to the count, the fol-
lowing formula is used to calculate the data:
count – 1
New average = ------------------------ × last average + --------------------------------------------------
count count
new measurement
Averaging values other than those displayed can be entered by using the
numeric keypad or the knob when the Avg Count active function area is dis-
played.
To set the number of points in a sweep
1
2
Traces
Press the front-panel
key.
Trace Setup....
Press the
softkey. The Trace Setup panel will appear.
The Trace Setup panel
3
Enter the desired sweep length in the setup panel. The minimum sweep length
is three points. The maximum sweep length is 10,001 points. Refer to “To Fill
In a Setup Panel” on page 3-65 for information on changing and selecting items
in the setup panel.
3-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Optical Spectrum Analyzer
The Wavelength Menus
The Wavelength Menus
Wavelength
The Wavelength softkeys are accessed using the front-panel
key or
change the wavelength settings, the front-panel Wavelength key provides
access to the following functions and setup panels:
Function
See....
Center Wavelength
Span
Start Wavelength
Stop Wavelength
Peak to Center
Wavelength Setup....
“To set the start wavelength” on page 3-62
“To set the stop wavelength” on page 3-62
“To set the peak to the center of the display” on page 3-63
“To change the default wavelength settings” on page 3-63
Note
When the optical spectrum analyzer is first turned on, the wavelength range is set to the
full 1100 nm span (600 nm to 1700 nm). Sweeps begin at the shortest wavelength (start)
and end at the longest wavelength (stop). You can set the center, stop, start, and span
wavelength values. The span is set symmetrically about the center wavelength.
3-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Optical Spectrum Analyzer
The Wavelength Menus
Using the Wavelength functions
To set the center wavelength
1
2
3
Wavelength
key.
Press the front-panel
Center WL
Press the
softkey.
Use the knob, step keys or numeric entry pad to enter the desired value.
To set the wavelength span
1
2
3
Wavelength
key.
Press the front-panel
Span
Press the
softkey.
Use the knob, step keys or numeric entry pad to enter the desired value.
The span is set symmetrically about the center wavelength. When the span is
set to 0 nm, the display’s horizontal axis represents time instead of wave-
length. A span of 0 nm (called zero span mode) configures the optical spec-
trum analyzer as a fixed tuned receiver.
To set the start wavelength
1
2
3
Wavelength
key.
Press the front-panel
Start WL
Press the
softkey.
Use the knob, step keys or numeric entry pad to enter the desired value.
To set the stop wavelength
1
2
3
Wavelength
key.
Press the front-panel
Stop WL
Press the
softkey.
Use the knob, step keys or numeric entry pad to enter the desired value.
3-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Optical Spectrum Analyzer
The Wavelength Menus
To set the peak to the center of the display
1
2
Wavelength
Press the front-panel
key.
Peak to CENTER
Press the
softkey to move the peak to the center of the display.
To change the default wavelength settings
1
2
Wavelength
Press the front-panel
key.
Wavelength Setup....
Press the
softkey. The Wavelength Setup panel opens.
The Wavelength Setup panel
Setup panel
selections
Wavelength Units
Sets the wavelength units to nm, um, or Ang.
Wavelength Calibration
The wavelength calibration is not a simple offset applied to all wavelengths,
but uses the trigonometric diffraction grating equation to correct all wave-
lengths in a calculated manner. The power offset is a simple offset applied
equally to all wavelengths. It is good measurement practice to calibrate the
optical spectrum analyzer as close as possible to the wavelength where you
plan to make your measurements.
User Wavelength Cal Date
Shows the date of the last successful user-performed wavelength calibration.
Wavelength Offset
Specifies the wavelength offset. This is an offset between the measured wave-
length and the displayed wavelength.
3-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Optical Spectrum Analyzer
The Wavelength Menus
Specifies the center wavelength step size.
Wavelengths Referenced In
Specifies if the displayed wavelengths show values as measured in air or in
Preset
vacuum. Pressing the front-panel
key sets this value to Vacuum. See
page 3-5 for more information on the Preset states.
3-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Optical Spectrum Analyzer
To Fill In a Setup Panel
To Fill In a Setup Panel
Setup panels allow you to adjust setup conditions which are not frequently
changed.
Using the softkeys The arrow softkeys
Allow the user to navigate from field to field in the dialog box. The highlighted
parameter can be changed.
The Select softkey
Selects or deselects the highlighted parameter.
The Defaults softkey
Resets the parameters to their default condition.
Close Panel.... softkey
Saves the current setup and returns the user to the previous menu.
The front-panel number keys, step keys, and knob
Allows the user to enter a numeric value in the highlighted field.
3-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Optical Spectrum Analyzer
To Fill In a Setup Panel
To use the navigation softkeys
1
2
3
Use the arrow softkeys to highlight the settings on the setup panel.
Select
Use the
softkey to toggle the selection boxes on and off.
Enter values in the numeric fields using the front-panel knob or numeric entry
pad.
4
5
Defaults
To return the setupvalues to theinstrument’s preset settings, press the
softkey.
Close Panel....
When you are satisfied with your selections, press the
enter your selections and close the setup panel.
softkey to
3-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4
STATus Subsystem Commands 4-91
SYSTem Subsystem Commands 4-93
TRACe Subsystem Commands 4-95
TRIGger Subsystem Commands 4-99
UNIT Subsystem Commands 4-101
HP 71450 Series Commands to HP 86140 Series Equivalents 4-102
Remote Operation
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
Remote Operation
Remote Operation
This chapter provides information on remote programming of the HP 86140-
series optical spectrum analyzers. The easiest way to program the instrument
plug&play
is by using the VXI
universal instrument drivers. The VXI-
plug&play
universal instrument drivers allow you to develop programs using
the following applications: HP VEE, LabVIEW1, LabWindows/CVI, C, C++, and
Microsoft®2 Visual Basic3.
If you desire more control of the instrument, you can use the HP-IB program-
ming commands that are documented in this chapter. The programming com-
mands are compatible with the Standard Commands for Programmable
Instruments (SCPI) standard. For more detailed information regarding the
HP-IB, the IEEE 488.2 standard, or the SCPI standard, refer to the following
books:
SCPI—Standard Commands for Programmable Instru-
SCPI Consortium.
ments,
1997.
IEEE Standard
International Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers.
488.1-1987, IEEE Standard Digital Interface for Programmable Instru-
mentation.
New York, NY, 1987.
IEEE Standard
International Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers.
488.2-1987, IEEE Standard Codes, Formats, Protocols and Common com-
mands For Use with ANSI/IEEE Std 488.1-1987.
New York, NY, 1987.
For situations where all you need to accomplish is capturing the instrument’s
display or returning trace data values to the computer, consider using the
HP N1031A BenchLink software that was shipped with the instrument.
1. LabVIEW and LabWindows/CVI are products of National Instruments Corporation.
2. Microsoft® is a U.S. registered trademark of Microsoft Corp.
3. Microsoft Visual Basic is a product of Microsoft Corp.
4-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
Remote Operation
Table 4-1. Front-Panel Features
Indicates that the instrument is operating under HP-IB control.
Indicates that the instrument has requested service from the computer.
Refer to
.
“Monitoring the Instrument” on page 4-11
Pressing this button activates the front-panel keys after a computer has had control
of the instrument.
4-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
Getting Started
Getting Started
One of the easiest ways to learn how to write programs to control the instru-
ment is to look at simple examples. In “Example Programs” on page 4-16,
you’ll find several useful example programs. Although they are written using
the HP BASIC language, you can easily convert them to the language that you
are using. The HP 86140 series’ HP-IB address is configured at the factory to a
value of 23. You must set the output and input functions of your programming
Preset
language to send the commands to this address. Pressing the green
does not change the HP-IB address.
key
To change the HP-IB address
1
2
3
front-panel System
key.
Press the
Press the
Press the
More System Functions
.... softkey.
Remote Setup
.... softkey, and change the HP-IB address.
Remote mode and front-panel lockout
RMT
Whenever the instrument is in Remote mode, the
message is displayed
on the instrument’s screen and all keys are disabled except for the front-panel
LOCAL
key. This key can be pressed by the user to restore front-panel control
of the instrument.
LOCAL
You can specify a local lockout mode that de-activates the front-panel
key. If the instrument is in local lockout mode, all the front-panel keys are dis-
abled.
Consult the documentation for your programming environment to determine
which commands are used to put an instrument in the remote and local lock-
out modes. These are not HP 86140 series commands; they control HP-IB con-
trol lines and do not send any characters to the instrument.
4-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
Getting Started
Remote command buffering
The OSA accepts serial data via HP-IB, testing each byte. Once a complete
command is received and interpreted, the HP-IB handshake is held until the
command operation is completed. Once completed, the next command byte is
read by the analyzer. If several commands are included in a single output
statement, the computer will not be able to complete the controller output
operation until the OSA has executed all of the commands. This process can
hold the HP-IB interface, or program control, past a timeout cycle.
For this reason, send individual commands rather than combining them. After
the command is correctly interpreted, the bus is held until the command exe-
cution is complete. If there are no other commands pending, the interface bus
is released and the controller can perform other tasks while the OSA is com-
pleting the operation.
Command buffering provides an automatic synchronization between the pro-
gram sending the commands and the analyzer operation. Each command will
be executed before another command is recognized. There is no danger of
reading or interpreting trace data in an indeterminate state, such as before a
sweep has completed.
Controlling the sweep
Placing the optical spectrum analyzer in remote mode and sending the
DISP:WIND:TRAC:ALL:SCAL:AUTO command finds the largest signal and
optimizes the analyzer settings. This command also sets single sweep mode on
the analyzer. If the DISP:WIND:TRAC:ALL:SCAL:AUTO command is not used,
single sweep can be set using the INIT:CONT OFF command. The trace data
present in the analyzer must be updated by taking a sweep when appropriate
using the INIT:IMM command. Use this command to update the sweep after
changing settings.
This mode of operation allows the program to control the sweep and ensure
that data read from, or operated on in the analyzer, is updated correctly. Con-
trolling the sweep also minimizes the amount of time the analyzer spends
sweeping. At high sensitivity and high resolution settings, sweeps can take a
significant amount of time. Controlling the sweep ensures that the amount of
time spent acquiring data is optimized and that the data being displayed is
valid for the current settings.
4-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
Getting Started
Syntax notation conventions
The following information applies to the common and instrument-specific
commands listed in this chapter. All measurement values and parameters are
sent and received as ASCII strings with the exception of the following com-
mands. These commands send and receive floating point binary data in IEEE
488.2 indefinite or definite length blocks:
HCOPy:DATA?
MMEMory:DATA
TRACe:DATA:Y:POWER
TRACe:DATA:Y:RATio
TRACe:DATA:Y?
MEMory:STATe:EXTended?
Uppercase lettering indicates that the uppercase portion of the command is
WAVelength WAV
the short form of the command. For example, in the command
is the short form.
,
Table 4-2. Syntax Notation Conventions
Convention
Description
Means is defined as.
::=
|
Indicates a choice of one element from a list. For example, A | B indicates A or
B, but not both.
Indicates the enclosed item is optional.
[ ]
{ }
Indicates the enclosed item can be incorporated in the command several
times, once, or not at all.
File names must conform to standard MS-DOS®a file naming conventions.
TRA, TRB, TRC, TRD, TRE, TRF
This parameter represents the arbitrary block program data as defined by IEEE
488.2. Arbitrary block program data allows any 8-bit bytes to be transmitted.
This includes extended ASCII control codes and symbols. Two types of data
blocks are defined: definite-length blocks and indefinite-length blocks.
<file_name>
<trace_name>
<data_block>
The definite-length block consists of a “#” character, followed by one digit
(in ASCII) specifying the number of length bytes to follow, followed by the
length (in ASCII), followed by length bytes of binary data. For example, two
bytes of binary data would be sent as follows:
#12<8 bit data byte><8 bit data byte>
The indefinite-length block consists of a “#” character, followed by a “0”
character (in ASCII), followed by any number of bytes of binary data. The data
stream is terminated by a new line character with EOI set. For example, two
bytes of binary data would be sent as follows:
#0<8 bit data byte><8 bit data byte>NL^EOI
a. MS-DOS is a U.S. registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
4-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
Getting Started
SCPI command are grouped in subsytems
In accordance with IEEE 488.2, the instrument’s commands are grouped into
“subsystems.” Commands in each subsystem perform similar tasks. The first
page of this chapter lists where each subsystem is documented.
Sending a command
It’s easy to send a command to the instrument. Simply create a command
string from the commands listed in this book, and place the string in your pro-
gram language’s output statement. For example, the following string places
marker1 on the peak of the active trace:
OUTPUT 723;”CALC:MARK1:MAX”
Use either short or long forms
Commands and queries may be sent in either long form (complete spelling) or
short form (abbreviated spelling). The description of each command in this
manual shows both versions; the extra characters for the long form are shown
in lowercase. The following is a long form of a command:
OUTPUT 723;”:SENSe:WAVelength:STARt?”
And this is the short form of the same command:
OUTPUT 723;”:SENS:WAV:STAR?”
You can use upper or lowercase letters
Program headers can be sent using any combination of uppercase or lower-
case ASCII characters. Instrument responses, however, are always returned in
uppercase.
Combine commands in the same subsystem
You can combine commands from the same subsystem provided that they are
both on the same level in the subsystem’s hierarchy; simply separate the com-
mands with a semi-colon (;). For example, the following two lines,
OUTPUT 723;”:SENS:WAV:STAR 1300NM”
OUTPUT 723;”:SENS:WAV:STOP 1400NM”
can be combined into one line:
OUTPUT 723;”:SENS:WAV:STAR 1300NM;STOP 1400NM”
The semicolon separates the two functions.
4-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
Getting Started
Combine commands from different subsystems
You can send commands and program queries from different subsystems on
the same line; simply precede the new subsystem by a semicolon followed by a
colon. In the following example, the colon and semicolon pair before CALC
allows you to send a command from another subsystem.
OUTPUT 723;”:SENS:WAV:SPAN:FULL;:CALC:MARK1:MAX”
Sending common commands
If a subsystem has been selected and a common command is received by the
instrument, the instrument remains in the selected subsystem. For example, if
the command
OUTPUT 723;”:SENS:WAV:STAR 1300NM;*CLS;STOP 1400NM”
is sent to the instrument, the Sense subsystem remains selected. If some other
type of command is received within a program message, you must reenter the
original subsystem after the command.
Adding parameters to a command
Many commands have parameters that specify an option. Use a space charac-
ter to separate the parameter from the command, as shown in the following
line:
OUTPUT 723;”:SENS:BWID:RES 0.1NM”
Separate multiple parameters with a comma (,). Spaces can be added around
the commas to improve readability.
OUTPUT 723;”:DISP:WIND:TRAC:STAT TRB, ON”
White space
White space is defined to be one or more characters from the ASCII set of
0 through 32 decimal, excluding 10 (NL). White space is usually optional, and
can be used to increase the readability of a program.
4-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
Getting Started
Numbers
All numbers are expected to be strings of ASCII characters. Thus, when send-
ing the number 9, you would send a byte representing the ASCII code for the
character “9” (which is 57). A three-digit number like 102 would take up three
bytes (ASCII codes 49, 48, and 50). This is taken care of automatically when
you include the entire instruction in a string. Several representations of a
number are possible. For example, the following numbers are all equal:
28, 0.28E2 and 280E-1.
If a measurement cannot be made, no response is given and an error is placed
into the error queue. For example,
*RST
:CALC1:MARK1:X?
Settings conflict
will timeout the controller and place a
queue.
error in the error
Table 4-3. Suffix Multipliers
Multiplier
Mnemonic
Multiplier
Mnemonic
1E18
1E15
1E12
1E9
EX
PE
T
1E-3
M
U
N
P
1E-6
1E-9
G
1E-12
1E-15
1E-18
1E6
MA
K
F
1E3
A
Program message terminator
The string of instructions sent to the instrument is executed after the instruc-
tion terminator is received. The terminator may be either a new-line (NL)
character, the End-Or-Identify (EOI) line asserted, or a combination of the
two. All three ways are equivalent. Asserting the EOI sets the EOI control line
low on the last byte of the data message. The NL character is an ASCII line-
feed (decimal 10). The NL terminator has the same function as an EOS (End
Of String) and EOT (End Of Text) terminator.
4-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
Getting Started
Querying data
Data is requested from the instrument using a query. Queries can be used to
find out how the instrument is currently configured. They are also used to
obtain results of measurements made by the instrument, with the query actu-
ally activating the measurement. String responses are returned as uppercase
letters.
Queries usually take the form of a command followed by a question mark (?).
After receiving a query, the instrument places the answer in its output queue.
The answer remains in the output queue until it is read or another command is
issued. For example, the query
OUTPUT 723;”:CALC:MARK1:X?”
places the wavelength of marker 1 in the output queue. In HP BASIC, the con-
troller input statement
ENTER 720;Range
passes the value across the bus to the controller and places it in the variable
Range. Sending another command or query before reading the result of a
query causes the output queue to be cleared and the current response to be
lost. This also generates an error in the error queue. The output of the instru-
ment may be numeric or character data depending on what is queried. Refer
to the specific commands for the formats and types of data returned from que-
ries. You can send multiple queries to the instrument within a single program
message, but you must also read them back within a single program message.
This can be accomplished by either reading them back into a string variable or
into multiple numeric variables. When you read the result of multiple queries
into string variables, each response is separated by a semicolon.
4-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
Monitoring the Instrument
Monitoring the Instrument
Your programs can monitor the HP 86140 series for its operating status,
including querying execution or command errors and determining whether or
not measurements have been completed. Several status registers and queues
are provided to accomplish these tasks as shown in Figure 4-1 on page 4-12.
The status structures shown in the figure consist of condition registers, event
registers, event enable registers, and, in the case of the Operation Status
Structure, transition filters. For example, there exists the Standard Status
Condition
Status
Event
Register, the Standard Status
Event Enable
Register, and the Standard
current
condition
Register. Condition registers show the
of the status lines. Event registers show that an event has occurred. Once
latched, these registers stay set until cleared. Event enable registers are
from an event register. For example, you can disable the reporting of the
Sweeping bit in the Operation Status structure so that, even though it goes
high in the registers, it can never set the summary bit 7 in the Status Byte
high.
Querying a register always returns the value as a decimal-weighted sum of all
set bits. Refer to Table 4-4 on page 4-11. For example, if the value returned
was 528, this would indicate that bits 4 and 9 were set. Mask registers are set
*ESE 60
using these same values. For example, the
command sets bits 2
through 5 of the Standard Status Event Enable Register. Whenever any one of
bits 2 through 5 of the Standard Status Event Register goes high, bit 5 of the
status byte will be set.
Table 4-4. Decimal Values of Event Enable Register Bits
Decimal
Value
Decimal
Value
Decimal
Value
Decimal
Value
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
0
1
2
3
1
2
4
8
4
5
6
7
16
8
256
12
13
14
15
4096
32
9
512
8192
64
10
11
1024
2048
16,384
32,768
128
4-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
Monitoring the Instrument
The
command clears all event registers and sets all bits in the
*CLS
event enable registers. Use the
ters and all queues except the output queue. If
lowing a program message terminator, the output queue is also cleared. In
*OPC
common command to clear all event regis-
*CLS
is sent immediately fol-
addition, the request for the
bit is also cleared.
For an example program using the status registers, refer to “Example 9. Moni-
toring the status registers” on page 4-29.
Status Byte
The Status Byte contains summary bits that monitor activity in the other sta-
tus registers and queues. The register’s bits are set and cleared by summary
bits from other registers or queues. If a bit in the Status Byte goes high, query
the value of the source register to determine the cause.
Command
Use
HP-IB serial poll command Returns the status byte value. Reads bit 6 as the
Request Service (RQS) bit and clears the bit
which clears the SRQ interrupt.
*STB?
common command
Returns the status byte value. Reads bit 6 as the
Master Summary Status (MSS) and does not
clear the bit or have any effect on the SRQ inter-
rupt.
*SRE
common command
Sets or reads the event enable register value
(mask).
Standard Status Structure
The Standard Status Structure monitors the following instrument status
events: operation complete, query error, device dependent error, execution
error, and command error. When one of these events occurs, the event sets
the corresponding bit in the register.
Command
Use
*ESR?
common command
Returns and clears the value of the event regis-
ter.
*OPC
common command
When all operations have finished, sets bit 0 of
the event register. The query returns a 1 when
all operations have finished.
*ESE
common command
Sets or returns the value of the event enable reg-
ister (mask).
4-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
Monitoring the Instrument
Operation Status Structure
Contains bits that report on the instrument’s normal operation. Additional
transition filters give you the ability to select the logic transitions which set
the event register bits. For example, you can define the Measuring bit of the
Operation Status Structure to be set when a status line transitions from false
to true. This is a positive transition. You can also specify a negative transition
where bits are set when a status line transitions from true to false.
Command
Use
STAT:OPER:COND?
STAT:OPER:EVEN?
STAT:OPER:ENAB
Returns the value of the condition register.
Returns the value of the event register.
Sets or returns the value of the event enable reg-
ister (mask).
STAT:OPER:NTR
STAT:OPER:PTR
Sets or returns the value of the negative transi-
tion register.
Sets or returns the value of the positive transi-
tion register.
Table 4-5. Bits in Operation Status Structure
Bit
Definition
0–15
not used
Questionable Status Structure
Contains bits that report on several questionable instruments conditions.
Command
Use
STAT:QUES:COND?
STAT:QUES:EVEN?
STAT:QUES:ENAB
Returns the value of the condition register.
Returns the value of the event register.
Sets or returns the value of the event enable reg-
ister (mask).
Table 4-6. Bits in Questionable Status Structure
Bit
Definition
0–15
not used
4-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
Monitoring the Instrument
Output Queue
The output queue stores the instrument responses that are generated by cer-
tain commands and queries that you send to the instrument. The output
queue generates the Message Available Summary bit when the output queue
contains one or more bytes. This summary bit sets the MAV bit (bit 4) in the
Status Byte. The method used to read the output queue depends upon the
programming language and environment. For example, with HP Basic, the
ENTER
output queue may be read using the
statement.
Error Queue
As errors are detected, they are placed in an error queue. Instrument specific
errors are indicated by positive values. General errors have negative values.
*CLS
You can clear the error queue by reading its contents, sending the
com-
mand, or by cycling the instrument’s power. The error queue is first in, first
out. If the error queue overflows, the last error in the queue is replaced with
error -350, “Queue overflow.” Any time the queue overflows, the least recent
errors remain in the queue, and the most recent error is discarded. The length
of the instrument’s error queue is 30 (29 positions for the error messages, and
1 position for the “Queue overflow” message). Querying errors removes the
oldest error from the head of the queue, which opens a position at the tail of
the queue for a new error. When all the errors have been read from the queue,
subsequent error queries return 0, “No error.”
Command
*CLS
Use
common command
SYSTem:ERRor?
Clears the error queue (and all event registers).
Returns and removes the oldest error from the
head of the queue.
4-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
Example Programs
Example Programs
These programs are provided to give you examples of using HP 86140 series
remote programming commands in typical applications. They are not meant to
dows.
Example 4. Maximum and minimum amplitude values 4-21
Example 5. Maximum and minimum values over time 4-23
Example 6. Returning trace data 4-24
Example 7. Trace normalization 4-26
Example 8. Total power measurement 4-28
Example 9. Monitoring the status registers 4-29
4-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
Example Programs
Example 1. Initialization and a simple measurement
Description
This program provides the basic building block for beginning development of a
*RST
measurement routine. The
common command resets the instrument to
predetermined settings to provide a common starting point. The automeasure
function locates the largest signal in the spectrum and optimizes the display of
the signal. The maximum signal is located and a marker placed on the signal.
This signal is then used for the autoalign function. Autoalign aligns the inter-
nal components of the OSA to compensate for any effects of handling, temper-
ature, and humidity. This operation should be performed whenever the
instrument is moved or the environmental conditions change. It should be per-
formed after the instrument is at operating temperature. Periodic use of
autoalign assures optimum performance. The program sets the start and stop
wavelength and the amplitude sensitivity.
Program
PRINT “Single Measurement Example”
OUTPUT 723;”disp:wind:text:data ‘Single Measurement’”
!
!*********************** Initialization Routine ******************
!
PRINT
OUTPUT 723;”*rst”
! Preset the instrument
! Automeasure
PRINT “Presetting the instrument”
!
PRINT
OUTPUT 723;”disp:wind:trac:all:scal:auto”
PRINT “Performing Automeasure”
!
PRINT
OUTPUT 723;”cal:alig:mark1”
PRINT “Performing Autoalign”
! Perform an autoalignment
!******************************************************************
PRINT
! Next line is the operation complete query used so that the text is not printed
! until after the Autoalign is complete
OUTPUT 723;”*opc?”
ENTER 723;Dum
PRINT “ ... measurement begins”
!
OUTPUT 723;”sens:wav:star 1314nm”
OUTPUT 723;”sens:wav:stop 1316nm”
OUTPUT 723;”sens:pow:dc:rang:low -70dbm”
OUTPUT 723;”sens:bwid:res 0.1 nm”
OUTPUT 723;”init:imm”
OUTPUT 723;”calc:mark1:max”
OUTPUT 723;”calc:mark1:scen”
OUTPUT 723;”init:imm”
!
! Set start wavelength
! Set stop wavelength
! Set ampl sensitivity
! Set the res bandwidth
! Take a sweep
! Locate max signal
! Marker to center
! Take a sweep
LOCAL 723
! Return to local operation
END
4-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
Example Programs
Example 2. Locating the largest signal
Description
Program
This program finds the largest signal, zooms to a narrow span, and then uses
markers to return signal wavelength and amplitude to the computer.
PRINT “OSA Zoom Example”
OUTPUT 723;”disp:wind:text:data ‘Display the largest Signal’”
!
PRINT
OUTPUT 723;”*rst”
! Preset the instrument
! Automeasure
PRINT “Presetting the instrument”
!
PRINT
OUTPUT 723;”disp:wind:trac:all:scal:auto”
PRINT “Performing Automeasure”
!
!
PRINT
OUTPUT 723;”cal:alig:mark1”
! Perform an autoalignment
PRINT “Performing Autoalign”
!
PRINT
! Next line is the operation complete query used so that the text is not printed
! until after the Autoalign is complete
OUTPUT 723;”*opc?”
ENTER 723;Dum
PRINT “...measurement begins”
!
OUTPUT 723;”init:imm”
! Take a single sweep
! Marker to peak
! Marker to center
! Set span
OUTPUT 723;”calc1:mark1:max”
OUTPUT 723;”calc1:mark1:scen”
OUTPUT 723;”sens:wav:span 10 nm”
!
OUTPUT 723;”init:imm”
! Take a single sweep
! Marker to peak
! Marker to center
OUTPUT 723;”calc1:mark1:max”
OUTPUT 723;”calc1:mark1:scen”
!
OUTPUT 723;”init:imm”
! Take a single sweep
!
OUTPUT 723;”calc1:mark1:x?”
! Read marker wavelength
ENTER 723;Markwl
!
OUTPUT 723;”calc1:mark1:y?”
! Read marker amplitude
ENTER 723;Markamp
!
PRINT “
Marker values”
PRINT
Markwl=Markwl*1.E+9
! Convert to nm
PRINT Markwl;”nm”,Markamp;”dBm”
!
LOCAL 723
END
4-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
Example Programs
Example 3. Bandwidth
Description
Program
The 20 dB marker BW function is used to determine the bandwidth of the sig-
nal. The program assumes a narrowband signal as an input.
PRINT
PRINT “20 dB Bandwidth example”
OUTPUT 723;”disp:wind:text:data ‘Signal Bandwidth Measurement’”
!
PRINT
PRINT “Presetting the instrument”
OUTPUT 723;”*rst”
! Preset the instrument
! Automeasure
!
PRINT
OUTPUT 723;”disp:wind:trac:all:scal:auto”
PRINT “Performing Automeasure”
!
PRINT
OUTPUT 723;”cal:alig:mark1”
! Perform an autoalign
PRINT “Performing Autoalign”
!
! Next line is the operation complete query used so that the text is not printed
! until after the Autoalign is complete
OUTPUT 723;”*opc?”
ENTER 723;Dum
PRINT “ ...measurement begins”
PRINT
!
OUTPUT 723;”sens:wav:span 10 nm”
!
! Set span
OUTPUT 723;”init:imm”
OUTPUT 723;”calc1:mark1:max”
OUTPUT 723;”calc1:mark1:scen”
!
OUTPUT 723;”calc1:mark1:x?”
ENTER 723;Markwl
OUTPUT 723;”calc1:mark1:y?”
ENTER 723;Markamp
! Take a sweep
! Marker to peak
! Marker to center
! Read marker wavelength
! Read marker amplitude
! Convert to standard measurement units (nm)
Markwl=Markwl*1.E+9
PRINT “Marker wavelength”;Markwl;”nm”
PRINT “Marker amplitude”;Markamp;”dBm”
PRINT
!
OUTPUT 723;”sens:bwid:res 0.1 nm”
OUTPUT 723;”sens:wav:span 2 nm”
OUTPUT 723;”init:imm”
!
! Set resolution bandwidth to min
! Set span to higher resolution
! Take a single sweep
OUTPUT 723;”calc1:mark1:max”
!
OUTPUT 723;”calc1:mark1:func:bwid:ndb -20.0 db”
OUTPUT 723;”calc1:mark1:func:bwid:int on”
! Marker to peak for reference point
! Selects db down where bw is calculated
! Enable bw marker interpolation
4-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
Example Programs
OUTPUT 723;”calc1:mark1:func:bwid:read wav”
! Sets the BW unit of measure to WL
! Enable bandwidth marker
OUTPUT 723;”calc1:mark1:func:bwid:stat on”
!
OUTPUT 723;”calc1:mark1:func:bwid:res?”
! Returns X axis values between markers
! Test for valid result
ENTER 723;Rbw
IF Rbw<9.E+37 THEN Cnt
PRINT “ BW not found”
STOP
Cnt:
! BW was determined
!
OUTPUT 723;”calc1:mark1:func:bwid:x:left?”
! Read left BW marker X axis value
! Read right BW marker X axis value
ENTER 723;Markleft
OUTPUT 723;”calc1:mark1:func:bwid:x:righ?”
ENTER 723;Markright
!
! Convert to standard measurement units (nm)
Rbw=Rbw*1.E+9
Markleft=Markleft*1.E+9
Markright=Markright*1.E+9
!
PRINT “20 dB Marker bandwidth”;Rbw;”nm”
PRINT “Left marker”;Markleft;”nm”
PRINT “Right marker”;Markright;”nm”
PRINT “Center”;Rbw/2+Markleft;”nm”
!
LOCAL 723;
END
4-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
Example Programs
Example 4. Maximum and minimum amplitude values
Description
Program
The marker delta function is used to find the maximum and minimum (peak
and pit) values of the signal.
PRINT “Peak to Pit Example”
OUTPUT 723;”disp:wind:text:data ‘Minimum & Maximum Signals’”
!
PRINT
OUTPUT 723;”*rst”
! Preset the instrument
! Automeasure
PRINT “Presetting the instrument”
!
PRINT
OUTPUT 723;”disp:wind:trac:all:scal:auto”
PRINT “Performing Automeasure”
!
PRINT
OUTPUT 723;”cal:alig:mark1”
! Perform an autoalignment
PRINT “Performing Autoalign”
!
PRINT
! Next line is the operation complete query used so that the text is not printed
! until after the Autoalign is complete
OUTPUT 723;”*opc?”
ENTER 723;Dum
PRINT “...measurement begins”
!
OUTPUT 723;”sens:wav:span 10 nm”
! Set span
!
OUTPUT 723;”init:imm”
! Take a single sweep
! Marker to peak
! Marker to center
OUTPUT 723;”calc1:mark1:max”
OUTPUT 723;”calc1:mark1:scen”
!
OUTPUT 723;”sens:pow:dc:rang:low -60dBm”
! Set sensitivity
! Take a single sweep
OUTPUT 723;”init:imm”
!
OUTPUT 723;”calc1:mark1:max”
! Marker to peak
! Read marker wavelength
OUTPUT 723;”calc1:mark1:x?”
ENTER 723;Markwl
OUTPUT 723;”calc1:mark1:y?”
! Read marker amplitude
ENTER 723;Markamp
!
! Turn on marker delta
OUTPUT 723;”calc1:mark1:func:delt:stat on”
!
OUTPUT 723;”calc1:mark1:min”
! Marker to pit
!
OUTPUT 723;”calc1:mark1:func:delt:y:offs?”
ENTER 723;Markdelty
! Read Delta Y Marker
! Read the x delta marker
OUTPUT 723;”calc1:mark1:func:delt:x:offs?”
ENTER 723;Markdeltx
!
4-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
Example Programs
PRINT “
Marker values”
PRINT
Markwl=Markwl*1.E+9
PRINT Markwl;”nm”,Markamp;”dBm”
! Convert to nm
! Convert to nm
!
Markdeltx=Markdeltx*1.E+9
PRINT
PRINT “Marker Delta Values”
PRINT
PRINT Markdeltx;”nm”,Markdelty;”dBm”
!
LOCAL 723
END
! Return control to local
4-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
Example Programs
Example 5. Maximum and minimum values over time
Description
Program
This program locates the largest signal using automeasure, and adjusts the
center wavelength, span, and sensitivity settings. Trace B is then viewed and
updated and set to maximum hold. Trace C is then viewed, updated, and set to
minimum hold. Signal variations with time can now be monitored.
PRINT “OSA Min/Max Hold Example”
OUTPUT 723;”disp:wind:text:data ‘OSA Min/Max Hold Example’”
!
PRINT
OUTPUT 723;”*rst”
! Preset the instrument
! Automeasure
PRINT “Presetting the instrument”
!
PRINT
OUTPUT 723;”disp:wind:trac:all:scal:auto”
PRINT “Performing Automeasure”
!
PRINT
OUTPUT 723;”cal:alig:mark1”
! Perform an autoalignment
PRINT “Performing Autoalign”
!
PRINT
! Next line is the operation complete query used so that the text is not printed
! until after the Autoalign is complete
OUTPUT 723;”*opc?”
ENTER 723;Dum
PRINT “... measurement begins”
!
! Set up and display the signal
!
OUTPUT 723;”sens:wav:cent 1315nm”
! Set the center wavelength
! Set the wavelength span
! Set the sensitivity
OUTPUT 723;”sens:wav:span 20nm”
OUTPUT 723;”sens:pow:dc:rang:low -65dBm”
!
! Update and view trace B and set it to max hold
!
OUTPUT 723;”disp:wind:trac:stat trB, on”
! View trace B
OUTPUT 723;”trac:feed:cont trB, Alw”
OUTPUT 723;”calc2:max:stat on”
! Update trace B
! Set trace B to max hold
!
! Update and view trace C and set it to min hold
!
OUTPUT 723;”disp:wind:trac:stat trC, on”
! View trace C
OUTPUT 723;”trac:feed:cont trC, Alw”
! Update trace C
OUTPUT 723;”calc3:min:stat on”
! Set trace C to min hold
!
OUTPUT 723;”init:cont on”
! Turn continuous sweep on
! Return control to local
!
LOCAL 723
END
4-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
Example Programs
Example 6. Returning trace data
Description
Program
This program locates the largest signal and then zooms to a narrow span. The
trace length is changed to 101 points and the entire trace data is read in and
printed on the display.
PRINT “OSA Trace Example”
OUTPUT 723;”disp:wind:text:data ‘Trace Readout’”
!
DIM Tdata(1:101)
! Create a trace array
! Wavelength data
DIM Wdata(1:101)
!
PRINT “Presetting the instrument”
PRINT
OUTPUT 723;”*rst”
! Preset the instrument
! Automeasure
!
OUTPUT 723;”disp:wind:trac:all:scal:auto”
PRINT “Performing Automeasure”
PRINT
!
OUTPUT 723;”cal:alig:mark1”
! Perform an autoalignment
PRINT “Performing Autoalign”
PRINT
!
PRINT
! Next line is the operation complete query used so that the text is not printed
! until after the Autoalign is complete
OUTPUT 723;”*opc?”
ENTER 723;Dum
PRINT “...measurement begins”
PRINT
!
OUTPUT 723;”sens:wav:span 10 nm”
! Set span
!
OUTPUT 723;”init:imm”
OUTPUT 723;”calc1:mark1:max”
OUTPUT 723;”calc1:mark1:scen”
!
OUTPUT 723;”init:imm”
!
! Take a single sweep
! Marker to peak
! Marker to center
! Take a single sweep
! Read in the trace data
OUTPUT 723;”sens:swe:poin 101”
OUTPUT 723;”init:imm”
!
OUTPUT 723;”form ascii”
OUTPUT 723;”trac:data:y? tra”
ENTER 723;Tdata(*)
!
! Read start, stop and trace length
!
OUTPUT 723;”sens:wav:star?”
! Set trace length to 101
! Take a single sweep
! Set data format to ASCII
! Request data
! Read data trace
! Read start wavelength
4-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
Example Programs
ENTER 723;Startw
OUTPUT 723;”sens:wav:stop?”
ENTER 723;Stopw
! Read stop wavelength
OUTPUT 723;”sens:swe:poin?”
ENTER 723;Tlength
! Read trace length
Bucket=(Stopw-Startw)/(Tlength-1)
PRINT “Data Point Size”,Bucket;”nm”
!
! Calculate bucket length
PRINT “Point”,” Wavelength”,”Amplitude”
!
! The following lines calculate the wavelength value of each point
!
!
!
of the trace. Note that wavelength values of a trace cannot
be directly queried.
FOR I=1 TO 101
Wlength=Startw+(Bucket*(I-1))
! Calculate point wavelength
! Convert to nm
Wlength=Wlength*1.E+9
PRINT I,Wlength,Tdata(I)
NEXT I
!
LOCAL 723
END
! Return to local operation
4-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
Example Programs
Example 7. Trace normalization
Description
Program
This program demonstrates trace normalization. Normalization is used to
observe changes to a displayed response. For example, run the program and
then bend the fiber to observe the change in signal level across the spectrum.
Trace C displays the difference between trace A and trace B.
PRINT “OSA Normalization Example”
OUTPUT 723;”disp:wind:text:data ‘OSA Normalization Example’”
!
!*********************** Initialization Routine ******************
!
PRINT
OUTPUT 723;”*rst”
! Preset the instrument
! Automeasure
PRINT “Presetting the instrument”
!
PRINT
OUTPUT 723;”disp:wind:trac:all:scal:auto”
PRINT “Performing Automeasure”
!
PRINT
OUTPUT 723;”cal:alig:mark1”
! Perform an autoalignment
PRINT “Performing Autoalign”
!
!******************************************************************
!
PRINT
! Next line is the operation complete query used so that the text is not printed
! until after the Autoalign is complete
OUTPUT 723;”*opc?”
ENTER 723;Dum
PRINT “... measurement begins”
!
OUTPUT 723;”Sens:Wav:Cent 1315 nm”
OUTPUT 723;”Sense:bwid:res 10nm”
! Fix resolution bw
!
OUTPUT 723;”Init:Imm”
!
! Trace A is the active trace
OUTPUT 723;”Disp:Wind:Trac:Stat TrA,On”
OUTPUT 723;”Trac:Feed:Cont TrA, Alw”
!
! Trace B is the reference trace
OUTPUT 723;”Disp:Wind:Trac:Stat TrB,On”
OUTPUT 723;”Trac:Feed:Cont TrB, Alw”
!
! Turn on Trace A
! Turn on Trace B
! Trace C displays the difference between A & B
OUTPUT 723;”Disp:Wind:Trac:Stat TrC,On”
OUTPUT 723;”Trac:Feed:Cont TrC, Alw”
!
! Turn on Trace C
! Stop updating B
OUTPUT 723;”Trac:Feed:Cont TrB,Nev”
4-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
Example Programs
!
OUTPUT 723;”Init:Cont On”
! Set continuous sweep
!
! Trace math function Log Math C=A-B
OUTPUT 723;”Calc3:Math:Expr (TRA / TRB)”
! Normalize Trace A to B
! Turn on normalization
OUTPUT 723;”Calc3:Math:Stat On”
!
LOCAL 723
END
! Return to local operation
4-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
Example Programs
Example 8. Total power measurement
Description
Program
This program demonstrates the total power function. The ASE broadband
noise power of an EDFA source is measured. Two sweeps are taken, one of the
entire trace and then another of just the noise hump. The total power of the
two different traces are displayed.
OUTPUT 723;”*rst”
! Preset the instrument
! Perform automeasure
OUTPUT 723;”disp:wind:trac:all:scal:auto”
!
OUTPUT 723;”sens:wav:span 10nm”
! Set the span
! Set resolution bandwidth
OUTPUT 723;”sens:bwid:res 5nm”
!
OUTPUT 723;”init:imm”
! Take a single sweep
!
OUTPUT 723;”calc1:tpow:stat 1”
! Turn the tpower state on
! Query the total power
OUTPUT 723;”calc1:tpow:data?”
!
ENTER 723;Tpower
PRINT “Entire Trace:”;Tpower
PRINT
! Print the total power
!
! Select portion of trace
OUTPUT 723;”calc1:tpow:iran:low 1547.6nm”
OUTPUT 723;”calc1:tpow:iran:upp 1552.6nm”
! Set the upper & lower
! total power limits for the calculated range.
!
OUTPUT 723;”calc1:tpow:data?”
! Query the total power
!
ENTER 723;Tpower
PRINT “Portion of trace:”;Tpower
! Print the total power
!
LOCAL 723
! Return to local operation
!
END
4-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
Example Programs
Example 9. Monitoring the status registers
Description
Program
This program presets the analyzer and then selects the largest signal using
automeasure. This program demonstrates the use of status registers to detect
programming errors. A serial poll is performed to read the instrument status
*STB?
byte. The same status byte is read with
. The internal error register is
also read and displayed. The error queue is queried to display the error condi-
tion.
PRINT “OSA Status Byte Example”
OUTPUT 723;”disp:wind:text:data ‘OSA Status Byte Example’”
!
!****************** Initialization routine *****************************
!
PRINT
OUTPUT 723;”*rst”
! Preset the analyzer
! Automeasure
PRINT “Presetting the analyzer”
!
PRINT
OUTPUT 723;”disp:wind:trac:all:scal:auto”
PRINT “Performing Automeasure”
!
!***********************************************************************
!
PRINT
! Next line is the operation complete query used so that the text is not printed
! until after the Automeasure is complete
OUTPUT 723;”*opc?”
ENTER 723;Dum
PRINT “... measurement begins”
!
OUTPUT 723;”*CLS”
! Clear Error Queue
!
OUTPUT 723;”*ESE 32”
! Set Standard Event Enable bit 5(32)
!
OUTPUT 723;”init:imm”
! Take a sweep
! Next line is the operation complete query used so that the text is not printed
! until after the Autoalign is complete
OUTPUT 723;”*opc?”
ENTER 723;Dum
!
Sbyte=SPOLL(723)
! Read serial poll status byte
PRINT
PRINT “Serial Poll Status Byte:”;Sbyte
PRINT
!
OUTPUT 723;”*stb?”
ENTER 723;Stat
! Read the Status Byte Register
PRINT “Status Byte Register:”;Stat
PRINT
4-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
Example Programs
!
OUTPUT 723;”*esr?”
! Read & clear the Std Event Status Register
ENTER 723;Stat
PRINT “Standard Event Status Register Byte:”;Stat
PRINT
!
REPEAT
OUTPUT 723;”system:error?”
! Query error queue entries
ENTER 723;Errno;Error$
PRINT “Error Queue”;Errno;Error$
UNTIL Errno=0
! Test for no error message in queue
!
LOCAL 723
END
4-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
Front Panel Functions to Remote Commands
Front Panel Functions to Remote Commands
This is a table of the front-panel functions of the HP 86140 series and the cor-
responding remote commands.
Table 4-7. Front Panel Function to Remote Command for the HP 86140 Series (1 of 6)
Front Panel Function
Amplitude
Remote Command
Amplitude Setup
Amplitude Units
UNITs:POWer
Auto Chop Mode
SENSe:CHOP:STATe
Auto Ranging
Auto Zero
SENSe:POWer:DC:RANGe:AUTO
CALibration:ZERO:AUTO
Power Calibration User
Power Calibration Factory
Reference Level Position
Display Mode Log | Linear
CALibration:POWer:STATe ON
CALibration:POWer:STATe OFF
DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:SCALe:RLPOS
DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:SCALe:SPACing LINear
DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:SCALe:SPACing LOGarithmic
Peak to Reference Level
CALCulate:MARKer:MAXimum
CALCulate:MARKer:SRLevel
Reference Level
Scale/Div
DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:SCALe:RLEVel
DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:SCALe:PDIVision
Sensitivity Auto | Man
Automatic: SENSe:POWer:DC:RANGe:LOWer:AUTO
Manual: SENSe:POWer:DC:RANGe:LOWer
Applications
Launch an Installed Application
Auto Align
None
CALibration:ALIGn:AUTO
DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:ALL:SCALe:AUTO
INITiate:CONTinuous
Auto Measure
Bandwidth/Sweep
Repeat. Sweep On | Off
4-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
Front Panel Functions to Remote Commands
Table 4-7. Front Panel Function to Remote Command for the HP 86140 Series (2 of 6)
Front Panel Function
Remote Command
Res BW Auto | Man
SENSe:BANDwidth:RESolution:AUTO
SENSe:BANDwidth|BWIDth:RESolution
Single Sweep
INITiate:IMMediate
Sweep Time Auto | Man
SENSe:SWEep:TIME:AUTO
SENSe:SWEep:TIME
Sync Out Low | Pulse | High
Trigger Delay
TRIGger[:SEQuence]:OUTPut
TRIGger[:SEQuence]:DELay
Trigger Mode
TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SLOPe
TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURce
Video BW Auto | Man
SENSe:BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo:AUTO
SENSe:BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo
Local operation
Local
Marker
Active Marker 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | Off
CALCulate:MARKer:STATe
CALCulate:MARKer:AOFF
Delta Marker On | Off
Line Marker Menu
CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:DELTa:STATe
All Line Markers Off
Advanced Line Marker Functions
Integrate Limit On | Off
Search Limit On | Off
Sweep Limit On | Off
Trace Integ On | Off
CALCulate:TPOWer:IRANge:STATe
CALCulate:MARKer:SRANge:STATe
SENSe:WAVelength:SRANge:STATe
CALCulate:TPOWer:STATe
Wavelength Marker 1
Integration Limit:CALCulate:TPOWer:IRANge:LOWer
Search Limit: CALCulate:MARKer:SRANge:LOWer
Sweep Limit: SENSe:WAVelength:SRANge:LOWer
Wavelength Marker 2
Integration Limit:CALCulate:TPOWer:IRANge:UPPer
Search Limit: CALCulate:MARKer:SRANge:UPPer
Sweep Limit: SENSe:WAVelength:SRANge:UPPer
Marker BW On | Off
CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:BANDwidth:STATe
Marker Search Menu
Search Mode Peak
Active Marker 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | Off
CALCulate:MARKer:STATe
CALCulate:MARKer:AOFF
CALCulate:MARKer:MAXimum:NEXT
CALCulate:MARKer:MAXimum:LEFT
CALCulate:MARKer:MAXimum:RIGHt
Next Peak Down ↓
Next Peak Left ←
Next Peak Right →
4-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
Front Panel Functions to Remote Commands
Table 4-7. Front Panel Function to Remote Command for the HP 86140 Series (3 of 6)
Front Panel Function
Remote Command
Peak Search
CALCulate:MARKer:MAXimum
Search Mode Pit
Active Marker 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | Off
CALCulate:MARKer:STATe
CALCulate:MARKer:AOFF
CALCulate:MARKer:MINimum:NEXT
CALCulate:MARKer:MINimum:LEFT
CALCulate:MARKer:MINimum:RIGHt
CALCulate:MARKer:MINimum
Next Pit Up ↑
Next Pit Left ←
Next Pit Right →
Pit Search
Marker Setup
Bandwidth/Marker Interpolation
On | Off
CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:BANDwidth:INTerpolation
BW Marker Units
Normal/Delta Marker Interpolation
On | Off
CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:BANDwidth:READout
CALCulate:MARKer:INTerpolation
Normal Marker Units
Peak Excursion ### dB
Pit Excursion ### dB
Noise Marker Reference Bandwidth
Threshold Value ### pW
Use Threshold On | Off
CALCulate:MARKer:X:READout
CALCulate:MARKer:PEXCursion:PEAK
CALCulate:MARKer:PEXCursion:PIT
CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:NOISe:BANDwidth
CALCulate:THReshold
CALCulate:THReshold:STATe
CALCulate:MARKer:SCENter
Marker to CENTER
Marker to REF LEVEL
Marker Trace A | B | C | D | E | F
Noise Marker On | Off
Peak Search
CALCulate:MARKer:SRLEVel
CALCulate:MARKer:TRACe
CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:NOISe:STATe
CALCulate:MARKer:MAXimum
SYSTem:PRESet
Preset
HCOPy:IMMediate
Print
Save/Recall
Backup/Restore Menu
Delete Menu
MMEMory:DELete
Fast Meas SAVE
Fast Meas RECALL
Format Floppy Disk
Recall Menu
MMEMory:INITialize
Measurement
*RCL
Recall From
FLOPpy | INTernal
4-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
Front Panel Functions to Remote Commands
Table 4-7. Front Panel Function to Remote Command for the HP 86140 Series (4 of 6)
Front Panel Function
Remote Command
Trace
Save Menu
File Name
MMEMory:LOAD:TRACe
<file_name>
*SAV
Measurement
Save Graphics
Save To
FLOPpy | INTernal
Trace Only
MMEMory:STORe:TRACe
System
Calibration
Power Cal Setup
Execute Calibration
CALibration:POWer
Set Calibration Power
Set Calibration Wavelength
Wavelength Calibration Setup
Execute Calibration
CALibration:POWer:VALue
CALibration:POWer:WAVelength
CALibration:WAVelength
Calibration Wavelength measured in
Set Calibration Wavelength
SENSe:CORRection:RVELocity:MEDium
CALibration:WAVelength:VALue
Help
Revision
*IDN?
Show Critical Errors
Show BW Errors
Show Notices
Show Warnings
SYSTem:ERRor?
SYSTem:ERRor?
SYSTem:ERRor?
More System Functions
Active Panel
Auto Measure Setup
Auto Meas at Marker
Scale/div
Auto
Optimize Sensitivity
Span
Auto
DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:ALL:SCALe:AUTO:MARKer
DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:SCALe:AUTO:PDIVision
DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:SCALe:AUTO:PDIVision:AUTO
DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:ALL:SCALe:AUTO:OPTimize
DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:X:SCALe:AUTO:SPAN
DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:X:SCALe:AUTO:SPAN:AUTO
Display Setup
Remote Setup
Service Functions
Adv Service Functions
4-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
Front Panel Functions to Remote Commands
Table 4-7. Front Panel Function to Remote Command for the HP 86140 Series (5 of 6)
Front Panel Function
Grating Order
Remote Command
SENSe:GORDer:AUTO
More Adv Service Menu
Power ON State
TransZ 2 - 3 Lock
Multi-Point Align
Wavelength Limit
Zero Now
SYSTem:PON:TYPE
CALibration:ALIGn:EXTernal
SENSe:WAVelength:LIMit
CALibration:ZERO:AUTO ONCE
Factory Preset
Move Active Area
Printer Setup
Printer Location
HCOPy:DESTination
Set Title
DISPlay:WINDow:TEXT:DATA
Traces
Active Trace A | B | C | D | E | F
Averaging Menu...
Update and view commands below may affect active trace
Averaging On | Off
CALCulate:AVERage:COUNt
CALCulate:AVERage:STATe OFF
Hold A None | Max | Min
CALCulate1-6:MAXimum:STATe ON
CALCulate1-6:MINimum:STATe ON
CALCulate1-6:MAXimum:STATe OFF
CALCulate1-6:MINimum:STATe OFF
Reset Min/Max Hold
CALCulate1-6:MAXimum:CLEar
CALCulate1-6:MINimum:CLEar
Trace Math Off
Default Math...
Exchange Math
Trace Setup...
CALCulate:MATH:STATe
CALCulate:MATH:EXPRession:DEFine
TRACe:EXCHange
Sweep ### Points
Update A... On | Off
SENSe:SWEep:POINts
TRACe:FEED:CONTrol TRA-TRF,ALWays
TRACe:FEED:CONTrol TRA-TRF,NEVer
View A On | Off
DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:STATe
Wavelength
Center Wavelength
Peak to Center
Start Wavelength
Stop Wavelength
Wavelength Setup
SENSe:WAVelength:CENTer
CALCulate:MARK:SCENter
SENSe:WAVelength:STARt
SENSe:WAVelength:STOP
4-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
Front Panel Functions to Remote Commands
Table 4-7. Front Panel Function to Remote Command for the HP 86140 Series (6 of 6)
Front Panel Function
Remote Command
Wavelength Referenced In
Wavelength Units
SENSe:CORRection:RVELocity:MEDium
Wavelength Calibration User
Wavelength Calibration Factory
Wavelength Offset
CALibrate:WAVelength:STATe ON
CALibrate:WAVelength:STATe OFF
SENSe:WAVelength:OFFSet
Wavelength Step Size
Wavelength Span
SENse:WAVelength:CENTer:STEP:INCRement
SENSe:WAVelength:SPAN
4-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
Command Trees
Command Trees
*CLS
Common
Commands
*ESE <numeric_value>
*ESR?
*IDN?
*OPC
*OPT?
*RCL <numeric_value>|<file_name>[INTernal|FLOPpy]
*RST
*SAV <numeric_value>|<file_name>[INTernal|FLOPpy]
*SRE <numeric_value>
*STB?
*TST?
*WAI
:AVERage
CALCulate
:CLEar
:COUNt <numeric_value>
[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1
:MARKer[1|2|3|4]
:AOFF
:FUNCtion
:BWIDth|BANDwidth
:INTerpolate OFF|ON|0|1
:NDB <param>
:READout FREQuency|WAVelength|TIME
:RESult?
[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1
:X:CENTer?
:X:LEFT?
:X:RIGHt?
:DELTa
:RESet
[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1
:X:OFFSet?
:FREQuency <param>
:TIME <param>
[:WAVelength] <param>
:X:READout FREQuency|WAVelength|TIME
:X:REFerence?
:Y:OFFSet?
:Y:REFerence?
:NOISe
:BWIDth|BANDwidth <param>
:RESult?
[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1
:PRESet
:INTerpolate OFF|ON|0|1
:MAXimum
4-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
Command Trees
:LEFT
:NEXT
:RIGHt
:MINimum
:LEFT
:NEXT
:RIGHt
:PEXCursion
[:PEAK] <param>
PIT <param>
:SCENter
:SRANge
:LOWer?
:FREQuency <param>
:TIME <param>
[:WAVelength] <param>
[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1
:UPPer?
:FREQuency <param>
:TIME <param>
[:WAVelength] <param>
:SRLevel
[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1
:TRACe TRA|TRB|TRC|TRD|TRE|TRF
:X?
:FREQuency <param>
:READout FREQuency|WAVelength|TIME
:TIME <param>
[:WAVelength] <param>
:Y?
:MATH
[:EXPRession][:DEFine] <expression>
:STATe OFF|ON|0|1
:MAXimum
:CLEar
[:STATe] ON|OFF|1|0
:MEAN
[:DATA]?
:STATe ON|OFF|1|0
:RANGe
:LOWer?
:FREQuency <param>
:TIME <param>
[:WAVelength] <param>
[:STATe] ON|OFF|1|0
:UPPer?
:FREQuency <param>
:TIME <param>
[:WAVelength] <param>
:MINimum
:CLEar
[:STATe] ON|OFF|1|0
:THReshold <param>
:STATe ON|OFF|1|0
:TPOWer
[:DATA]?
4-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
Command Trees
:STATe ON|OFF|1|0
:IRANge
:LOWer <param>
[:STATe] ON|OFF|1|0
:UPPer <param>
:ALIGn
[:AUTO]
CALibration
:MARKer[1|2|3|4]
:EXTernal
:PRESet
:DATE?
:POWer
:DATE?
:STATe OFF|ON|0|1
:VALue <param>
:WAVelength <param>
:PRESet
:STATe OFF|ON|0|1
:WAVelength
:DATE?
:MARKer[1|2|3|4]
:STATe OFF|ON|0|1
:VALue <param>
:ZERO[:AUTO] OFF|ON|0|1|ONCE
[:WINDow[1]]
DISPlay
:ANNotation[:ALL] ON|OFF|0|1
:TEXT
:CLEar
:DATA <string> | <data_block>
:TRACe
:ALL[:SCALe][:AUTO]
:MARKer OFF|ON|0|1
:OPTimize OFF|ON|0|1
:GRATicule:GRID[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1
[:STATe] <trace_name>, OFF|ON|0|1
:X[:SCALe]:AUTO:SPAN <numeric_value>[M|NM|UM]
:X[:SCALe]:AUTO:SPAN:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1
:Y[:SCALE]
:AUTO:PDIVision <numeric_value>[DB]
AUTO:PDIVision :AUTO OFF|ON|0|1
[1|2]:LINear OFF|ON|0|1
:PDIVision <numeric_value>[DB]
:RLEVel <numeric_value>[DBM]
:RPOSition <numeric_value>
:SPACing [LINear|LOGarithmic]
[:DATA] <param>
FORMat
HCOPy
:DATA?
:DESTination <data_handle>
[:IMMediate]
4-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
Command Trees
:CONTinuous OFF|ON|0|1
[:IMMediate]
INITiate
:STATe:[EXTended]?
MEMory
:CATalog? [INTernal|FLOPpy]
MMEMory
:DATA <file_name>, <data_block>
:DELete <file_name>[,INTernal|FLOPpy]
:INITialize [FLOPpy]
:LOAD:TRACe <trace_name>,<file_name>[,INTernal|FLOPpy]
:STORe:TRACe <trace_name>,<file_name>[,INTernal|FLOPpy]
:BANDwidth|BWIDth
[:RESolution] <param>
:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1
SENSe
:RATio <numeric_value>
:VIDeo <numeric_value>
:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1
:CHOP[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1
:CORRection
:RVELocity:MEDium AIR|VACuum
:GORDer[:AUTO] OFF|ON|0|1
:POWer[:DC]:RANGe
:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1
:LOCK OFF|ON|0|1
:LOWer <numeric_value>|<step>
:LOWer :AUTO OFF|ON|0|1
:DETector
:SWEep
:POINts <numeric_value>
:TIME <param>
:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1
:WAVelength
:CENTer <numeric_value>
:STEP:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1
:STEP[:INCRement] <numeric_value>
:LIMit OFF|ON|0|1
:OFFSet <param>
:SPAN <numeric_value>
:FULL
:SRANge
:LOWer <param>
[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1
UPPer <param>
:STARt <numeric_value>
:STOP <numeric_value>
:PULSe
SOURce[n]
:DCYCle <numeric_value>
:WIDTh <numeric_value>
4-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
Command Trees
:OPERation
STATus
:CONDition?
:ENABle <int_value>
:EVENt?
:NTRansition <int_value>
:PTRansition <int_value>
:PRESet
:QUEStionable
:CONDition?
:ENABle <int_value>
:EVENt?
:DATE?
SYSTem
TRACe
:ERRor[:NEXT]?
:HELP:HEADers?
:PON[:TYPE] PRESet|LAST
:PRESet
:TIME?
:TZONe:NAME?
:VERSion?
[:DATA]
:X:TIME:SSTOp <trace_name>,<numeric_value>,<numeric_value>
:X:STARt? <trace_name>
:X:STOP? <trace_name>
:X[:WAVelength]:SSTOP <trace_name>,<numeric_value>,<numeric_value>
[:Y]? <trace_name>
[:POWer] <trace_name>,<data_block>|<numeric_value>{,<numeric value>}
:RATio <trace_name>,<data_block>|<numeric_value>{,<numeric value>}
:EXCHange <trace_1> | <trace_2>
:FEED:CONTrol <trace_name>, ALWays | NEVer
:POINts <trace_name>[,<numeric_value>]
[:SEQuence]
TRIGer
:DELay <numeric_value> [<unit>]
:OUTPut OFF|ON|0|1
:PULSE
:DCYCle <param>
:WIDTh <param>
:SLOPe POSitive|NEGative|EITHer
:SOURce IMMediate|EXTernal|INTernal
:POWer DBM|W|AUTO
:RATio DB|LINear|AUTO
UNIT
4-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
Common Commands
Common Commands
*CLS
Clears all the event status registers summarized in the status byte register.
This command resets the status data structure. It does this by emptying the
error queue and clearing all bits in all of the event registers.
*ESE <numeric_value>
Sets the bits in the Standard Event Enable register. The Standard Event regis-
ter monitors HP-IB errors and synchronization conditions such as operation
complete, request control, query error, device dependent error, execution
error, command error, and power on. The parameter is rounded to an integer
value and interpreted as a binary number, representing the bit values of the
register.
*ESE?
*ESR?
Returns the value of the Standard Event Enable register.
Reads and clears the Standard Event Status register. The register is cleared
when it is read. The response value is an integer, to be interpreted as a binary
number, representing the bit values of the register.
*IDN?
Returns a string value which identifies the instrument type and firmware ver-
sion. The string is a comma-separated list consisting of Manufacturer, Model
Number, Serial Number, and Firmware Revision.
4-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
Common Commands
*OPC
Sets bit 0 in the Standard Event Status register when all pending operations
have finished.
*OPC?
Returns a 1 when all operations have finished.
*OPT?
Returns a comma-separated list of strings that identifies the optical spectrum
analyzer's option configuration. A 0 indicates no options are present.
*RCL <numeric_value>|<filename>[,INTernal|FLOPpy]
Recalls previously saved instrument settings from the requested register or
file.
*RST
Executes a device reset and returns the instrument to a known state. This
command is not the same as the SYSTem:PRESet command. See page 3-5 for a
list of the instrument preset conditions. The *RST settings are the same as for
OFF
SYSTem:PRESet, except that Repeat Sweep is turned
.
*SAV <numeric_value>|<filename>[,INTernal|FLOPpy]
Saves instrument settings to the designated register or file.
*SRE <numeric_value>
Sets the bits in the Service Request Enable register. The parameter is rounded
to an integer value and interpreted as a binary number, representing the bit
values of the register. The Service Request Enable register serves as a mask
for the Status Byte. When a bit in the Status Byte goes to 1, if the correspond-
ing bit in the Service Request Enable register is a 1, the instrument asserts the
Service Request line on the HP-IB.
*SRE?
Returns the value of the Service Request Enable register.
4-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
Common Commands
*STB?
Returns the current value of the instrument’s Status Byte. This will not change
the Status Byte register. The response value is an integer, to be interpreted as
a binary number, representing the bit values of the register. Performing a
serial poll on the instrument also reads the Status Byte register, except that
bit 6 indicates whether there is a service request that has not been serviced.
The most convenient way to clear the Status Byte register is to send a *CLS
command. The Status Byte register summarizes the states of the other regis-
ter sets. It is also responsible for generating service requests.
*TST?
*WAI
Tests the analyzer interface hardware and returns 0 if the interface is func-
tional.
Prevents the instrument from executing any further commands until the cur-
rent command has finished executing. The *WAI command ensures that over-
lapped commands are completely processed before subsequent commands,
This command is not
those sent after the *WAI command, are processed.
needed by the optical spectrum analyzer, since all commands are non-
overlapped, but it is included for compatibility with existing programs
that might use it.
4-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
CALCulate Subsystem Commands
CALCulate Subsystem Commands
The CALCulate subsystem performs post-acquisition data processing. The
CALCulate subsystem operates on data acquired by a SENSe function. For
1997 SCPI Command Reference.
more information, refer to page 4-1 of the
Note
CALC: is interpreted as CALC1:. CALC1 controls TRA, CALC2 controls TRB, CALC3 con-
trols TRC, CALC4 controls TRD, CALC5 controls TRE, and CALC6 controls TRF.
CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:AVERage:CLEar
Causes the average data to be cleared and the average counter to be reset to
zero.
CALCulate:AVERage:COUNt <numeric_value>
CALCulate:AVERage:COUNt?
Sets the number of measurements to be averaged. When the number of mea-
surements taken is less than the count, the following formula is used to calcu-
late the data:
sum of all measurements
AVG = ---------------------------------------------------------------------
number of measurements
If the number of measurements is greater than or equal to the count, the fol-
lowing formula is used to calculate the data:
count – 1
count
new measurement
New average = ------------------------ × last average + --------------------------------------------------
count
4-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
CALCulate Subsystem Commands
CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:AVERage[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1
CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:AVERage[:STATe]?
ON
OFF
Turns trace averaging
and
. If a math expression with the correspond-
OFF
ing CALCulate subopcode is
, the SENSe:DATA is averaged. If the math
ON
expression is , the result of the math expression is averaged.
The CALCulate:AVERage, CALCulate:MAXimum, and CALCulate:MINimum
states are mutually exclusive. Each trace can have only one of these functions
ON
on at a time. Turning CALCulate:AVERage
late:MAXimum and CALCulate:MINimum
CALC blocks turned on.
will automatically turn CALCu-
. Each trace can have different
OFF
CALCulate:MARKer:AOFF
Turns off all markers and marker functions.
Note
If no marker number is given in the following marker commands, the command is inter-
preted as referring to marker number 1. For example, CALC:MARK ON is equivalent to
CALC:MARK1 ON.
Note
Going to zero span will turn off all markers. This is because markers are referenced to a
particular time or wavelength not a particular display position. Going out of zero span
will restore the markers to the state they were in before going to zero span. Changing to
or from zero span changes the fundamental units for the X-axis.
CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:BWIDth|BANDwidth:INTerpolate OFF|ON|0|1
CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:BWIDth|BANDwidth:INTerpolate?
ON
OFF
Turns the bandwidth marker interpolation
or
. When interpolation is
ON
, the bandwidth markers will be placed at the exact NDB setting from the
normal marker if the trace data allows. The position of the marker will be lin-
ON
early interpolated between two true trace data points. The default state is
.
OFF
If interpolate is
, for negative NDB values, the bandwidth markers will be at
4-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
CALCulate Subsystem Commands
values closest to and more negative than the NDB value. For positive NDB val-
ues, the bandwidth markers will be at values closest to and more positive than
the NDB values. This will typically result in a wider bandwidth measurement.
This is a global setting and controls the interpolation state for all four band-
width markers.
CALCulate:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:FUNCtion:BWIDth|BANDwidth:NDB <numeric_value>
CALCulate:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:FUNCtion:BWIDth|BANDwidth:NDB?
Sets the desired vertical offset from the numbered marker of the bandwidth
markers. The parameter units are as specified in the UNIT:RATio command.
This value can be set or queried anytime. The marker does not have to be on
or in the bandwidth function.
CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:BWIDth|BANDwidth:READout FREQuency|WAVelength|TIME
CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:BWIDth|BANDwidth:READout?
Sets the X-axis readout for frequency or wavelength when the instrument is in
a non-zero span. This setting controls only the bandwidth marker X-axis read-
outs and the X:Left? and X:Right? queries. The delta markers have their own
setting. This setting controls all four bandwidth markers.
Trying to set the readout to TIME when in a non-zero span generates a “Set-
tings conflict” error. Trying to set the readout to FREQuency or WAVelength
when in zero span also generates a “Settings conflict” error. When the instru-
ment is set to zero span, the readout will automatically change to TIME. This
command is primarily useful for non-zero spans.
CALCulate:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:FUNCtion:BWIDth|BANDwidth:RESult?
Returns the difference in the X-axis values between the left and right band-
width markers. The units returned are determined by the
CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:BWIDth|BANDwidth:X:READout state. For
READout of FREQuency, the result is returned in Hertz. For READout of
WAVelength, the result is returned in meters.
If the bandwidth markers cannot find the desired NDB setting relative to the
normal marker, the result returned will be 9.91e37. This value is defined by
the SCPI standard to represent NaN (not a number).
This query generates a “Settings conflict” error if the bandwidth function is
OFF
for the specified marker.
4-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
CALCulate Subsystem Commands
CALCulate:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:FUNCtion:BWIDth|BANDwidth[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1
CALCulate:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:FUNCtion:BWIDth|BANDwidth[:STATe]?
ON
OFF
Turns the bandwidth marker function
or
for a particular marker. Only
one marker function is allowed to be on at a time for each individual marker.
Turning on the bandwidth function for a marker will turn off any other marker
function and turn on the Bandwidth function. For example, turning on the
ON
OFF
Bandwidth function for a marker that has the Delta function , will turn
ON
the Delta function and turn
the Bandwidth function for the marker.
ON
OFF
If the bandwidth function is turned
for a marker that is
, the marker will
ON
be turned , placed at the center wavelength, and then the bandwidth mark-
ers will measure the bandwidth relative to this marker.
CALCulate:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:FUNCtion:BWIDth|BANDwidth:X:CENTer?
Returns the absolute X-axis value from the center of the bandwidth marker
(mean of the left and right markers). The units returned are determined by
the CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:BWIDth|BANDwidth:X:READout state. For
READout of FREQuency, the X value is returned in Hertz. For READout of
WAVelength, the X value is returned in meters.
This query generates a “Settings conflict” error if the bandwidth function is
OFF
for the specified marker.
CALCulate:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:FUNCtion:BWIDth|BANDwidth:X:LEFT?
Returns the absolute X-axis value of the left bandwidth marker. The units
returned are determined by the CALCulate:MARKer:FUNC-
tion:BWIDth|BANDwidth:X:READout state. For READout of FREQuency, the
X value is returned in Hertz. For READout of WAVelength, the X value is
returned in meters.
This query generates a “Settings conflict” error if the bandwidth function is
OFF
for the specified marker.
4-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
CALCulate Subsystem Commands
CALCulate:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:FUNCtion:BWIDth|BANDwidth:X:RIGHt?
Returns the absolute X-axis value of the right bandwidth marker. The units
returned are determined by the CALCulate:MARKer:FUNC-
tion:BWIDth|BANDwidth:X:READout state. For READout of FREQuency, the
X value is returned in Hertz. For READout of WAVelength, the X value is
returned in meters. For READout of WAVelength, the X value is returned in
meters.
This query generates a “Settings conflict” error if the bandwidth function is
OFF
for the specified marker.
CALCulate:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:FUNCtion:DELTa:RESet
Sets the reference for the delta marker to the current position of the delta
marker.
CALCulate:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:FUNCtion:DELTa[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1
CALCulate:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:FUNCtion:DELTa[:STATe]?
ON
OFF
Turns the delta marker function
or
for a particular marker. Individual
markers can have only one marker function on at a time.
ON
Turning the delta function for a marker
will turn any other marker function
OFF
ON
. For example, turning the delta function
for a marker that has the
ON
OFF
bandwidth function , will turn the bandwidth function
and turn the
ON
delta function
for the marker.
ON
OFF
If the delta function is turned
for a marker that is
, the marker will be
ON
turned , placed at the center wavelength, and the delta function will be
ON
turned
.
CALCulate:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:FUNCtion:DELTa:X:OFFSet?
Returns the difference between the absolute X-axis value of the delta marker
and the X-axis value of the reference marker.
The units of the value returned by the query are determined by the CALCu-
late:MARKer:FUNCtion:DELTa:X:READout state. For READout of FRE-
Quency, the units are Hertz. For READout of WAVelength, the units are
meters. For READout of TIME, the units are seconds.
OFF
This query generates a “Settings conflict” error if the delta function is
for
the specified marker.
4-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
CALCulate Subsystem Commands
CALCulate:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:FUNCtion:DELTa:X:OFFSet:FREQuency <numeric_value>
Allows the user to set the marker offset in frequency units. The marker X-axis
the reference X value the offset value
value corresponds to
+
. The default
units of the parameter for this command are Hertz.
OFF
This query generates a “Settings conflict” error if the delta function is
for
the specified marker.
CALCulate:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:FUNCtion:DELTa:X:OFFSet:TIME <numeric_value>
Allows the user to set the marker offset when the instrument is in zero span.
the reference X value the offset
The marker X-axis value corresponds to
+
value
. The default units of the parameter are seconds.
OFF
This query generates a “Settings conflict” error if the delta function is
for
the specified marker.
CALCulate:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:FUNCtion:DELTa:X:OFFSet[:WAVelength]<numeric_value>
Allows the user to set the marker offset in wavelength units. The marker X-
the reference X value the offset value
axis value corresponds to
default units of the parameter are meters.
+
. The
Even though the offset READout may be FREQuency, this command can still
be used to specify the offset using wavelength units.
For example:
CALC:MARK:FUNC:DELT:X:OFFS:WAV 10NM when readout is WAVElength
CALC:MARK:FUNC:DELT:X:OFFS:FREQ 10THZ when readout is FREQuency
CALC:MARK:FUNC:DELT:X:OFFS:WAV 1E-8M when readout is FREQuency
OFF
This query generates a “Settings conflict” error if the delta function is
for
the specified marker.
CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:DELTa:X:READout FREQuency|WAVelength|TIME
CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:DELTa:X:READout?
Sets the X-axis readout for frequency or wavelength when the instrument is in
a non-zero span. This setting controls only the delta offset and the delta refer-
ence X-axis readouts. The bandwidth markers have their own setting. This
setting controls all four delta markers.
4-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
CALCulate Subsystem Commands
Trying to set the readout to TIME when in a non-zero span generates a “Set-
tings conflict” error. Trying to set the readout to FREQuency or WAVelength
when in a zero span also generates a “Settings conflict” error. When the instru-
ment is set to zero span, the readout will automatically change to TIME. If the
OFF
delta marker is
a “Settings conflict” error is generated. This command is
primarily useful for non-zero spans.
CALCulate:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:FUNCtion:DELTa:X:REFerence?
Returns the X-axis value of the reference marker. The units of the returned
value are determined by the CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:DELTa:X:READ-
out setting. For a READout of FREQuency, the return value is in Hertz. For a
READout of WAVelength, the return value is in meters. For READout of TIME,
the X value is returned in seconds.
OFF
This query generates a “Settings conflict” error if the delta function is
for
the specified marker.
CALCulate:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:FUNCtion:DELTa:Y:OFFSet?
Returns the difference between the delta marker absolute Y value and the ref-
erence Y value.
OFF
This query generates a “Settings conflict” error if the delta function is
for
the specified marker.
CALCulate:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:FUNCtion:DELTa:Y:REFerence?
Returns the Y-axis value of the reference marker.
OFF
This query generates a “Settings conflict” error if the delta function is
for
the specified marker.
CALCulate:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:FUNCtion:NOISe:BWIDth|BANDwidth <numeric_value>
CALCulate:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:FUNCtion:NOISe:BWIDth|BANDwidth?
Sets the normalization bandwidth for the marker noise result query. The
default units for the parameter are meters. There are only two allowable set-
tings: 1 nm and 0.1 nm. Sending any value outside this range will generate a
"Data out of range" error. Sending a value within this range will set the band-
width to whichever of the two possible settings is closest to the specified
OFF
value. If the specified noise marker is
ated.
, a “Settings conflict” error is gener-
4-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
CALCulate Subsystem Commands
CALCulate:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:FUNCtion:NOISe:RESult?
This query returns the noise marker value normalized to 1 or 0.1 nm. The nor-
malization bandwidth is controlled by the CALCulate:MARKer:FUNC-
tion:NOISe:BWIDth command.
OFF
This query generates a “Settings conflict” error if the noise function is
for
the specified marker.
CALCulate:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:FUNCtion:NOISe[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1
CALCulate:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:FUNCtion:NOISe[:STATe]?
ON
OFF
Turns the marker noise function
or
for a particular marker. Individual
markers can have only one marker function on at a time. Use the
CALCulate:MARKer:X command to position the noise marker.
CALCulate:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:FUNCtion:PRESet
OFF
Turns
all marker functions for the specified marker. This command is pro-
vided as a convenient way to turn all marker functions off without having to
check the state of each individual marker function. If the marker specified by
OFF
ON
this command is
, the marker will be turned
with all marker functions
OFF
, that is, the marker will be in the “normal” marker mode.
CALCulate:MARKer:INTerpolate OFF|ON|0|1
CALCulate:MARKer:INTerpolate?
ON
OFF
Turns the normal/delta marker interpolation
or
. When interpolation is
ON
, the normal/delta markers will be placed at the exact X setting, if the trace
data allows. The marker will linearly interpolate between two true trace data
OFF
points. The default state is
.
This setting controls the interpolation state for all four markers, except for the
bandwidth markers.
CALCulate:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:MAXimum
Places the specified marker on the highest point of the trace. The point does
not
have to meet the peak excursion and threshold criteria. The marker trace
is determined by the CALCulate:MARKer:TRACe command. If the specified
OFF
ON
marker is
, it will be turned
and placed on the highest point of the trace.
4-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
CALCulate Subsystem Commands
CALCulate:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:MAXimum:LEFT
Places the marker on the next peak located at a shorter wavelength than the
current marker wavelength position. This next peak must meet the peak
OFF
excursion and threshold criteria. If the specified marker is
, it will be
ON
turned , placed at the center wavelength, and the search to the left will
begin from that point.
CALCulate:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:MAXimum:NEXT
Places the marker on the next highest peak from the current marker ampli-
tude. This next highest peak must meet the peak excursion and threshold cri-
OFF
ON
teria. If the specified marker is
, it will be turned , placed at the center
wavelength, and the search for the next maximum will begin from that point.
CALCulate:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:MAXimum:RIGHt
Places the marker on the next peak located at a longer wavelength than the
current marker wavelength position. This next peak must meet the peak
OFF
excursion and threshold criteria. If the specified marker is
, it will be
ON
turned , placed at the center wavelength, and the search to the right will
begin from that point.
CALCulate:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:MINimum
Places the specified marker on the lowest point of the trace. The point does
not
have to meet the pit excursion and threshold criteria. The marker trace is
determined by the CALCulate:MARKer:TRACe command. If the specified
OFF
ON
marker is
, it will be turned
and placed on the lowest point of the trace.
CALCulate:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:MINimum:LEFT
Places the marker on the next pit located at a shorter wavelength than the
current marker wavelength position. This next pit must meet the pit excursion
OFF
ON
and threshold criteria. If the specified marker is
, it will be turned
,
placed at the center wavelength, and the search to the left will begin from that
point.
4-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
CALCulate Subsystem Commands
CALCulate:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:MINimum:NEXT
Places the marker on the next lowest pit from the current marker amplitude.
This next lowest pit must meet the pit excursion and threshold criteria. If the
OFF
ON
specified marker is
, it will be turned , placed at the center wavelength,
and the search for the next minimum will begin from that point.
CALCulate:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:MINimum:RIGHt
Places the marker on the next pit located at a longer wavelength than the cur-
rent marker wavelength position. This next pit must meet the pit excursion
OFF
ON
and threshold criteria. If the specified marker is
, it will be turned
,
placed at the center wavelength, and the search to the right will begin from
that point.
CALCulate:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:PEXCursion[:PEAK] <numeric_value>
CALCulate:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:PEXCursion[:PEAK]?
Sets the peak excursion value for the marker search routines. The peak excur-
sion value is used to determine whether or not a local maximum in the trace is
to be considered a peak. To qualify as a peak, both sides of the local maximum
must fall by at least the peak excursion value.
CALCulate:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:PEXCursion:PIT <numeric_value>
CALCulate:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:PEXCursion:PIT?
Sets the pit excursion value for the marker search routines. The pit excursion
value is used to determine whether or not a local minimum in the trace is to be
considered a pit. To qualify as a pit, both sides of the local minimum must rise
by at least the pit excursion value.
CALCulate:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:SCENter
Sets the center wavelength to the wavelength value of the marker.
CALCulate:MARKer:SRANge:LOWer?
Returns the lower limit for the marker search range. The range used for the
marker search range is the same range used for the total power calculation,
the trace mean range, and the wavelength sweep range. The return value is in
meters, unless span is set to zero, in which case the return value is in seconds.
4-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
CALCulate Subsystem Commands
CALCulate:MARKer:SRANge:LOWer:FREQuency <param>
Sets the lower limit for the marker search range. Setting this value when
OFF
CALCulate:MARKer:SRANge:STATe is
will automatically turn
ON
CALCulate:MARKer:SRANge:STATe . The range used for the marker search
range is the same range used for the total power calculation, the trace mean
range, and the wavelength sweep range. Changing the range with this com-
mand will change all four ranges. Sending the command when the instrument
is in a zero span will generate a “Settings conflict” error. The default units for
the parameter is in Hertz.
CALCulate:MARKer:SRANge:LOWer:TIME <param>
Sets the lower limit for the marker search range. Setting this value when
OFF
CALCulate:MARKer:SRANge:STATe is
will automatically turn
ON
CALCulate:MARKer:SRANge:STATe . The range used for the marker search
range is the same range used for the total power calculation, the trace mean
range, and the wavelength sweep range. Changing the range with this com-
mand will change all four ranges. Sending this command while span is not set
to zero will results in a “Settings conflict” error. Default units for the parame-
ter is in seconds.
CALCulate:MARKer:SRANge:LOWer[:WAVelength] <param>
Sets the lower limit for the marker search range. Setting this value when
OFF
CALCulate:MARKer:SRANge:STATe is
will automatically turn
ON
CALCulate:MARKer:SRANge:STATe . The range used for the marker search
range is the same range used for the total power calculation, the trace mean
range, and the wavelength sweep range. Changing the range with this com-
mand will change all four ranges. Sending the command when the instrument
is in a zero span will generate a “Settings conflict” error. Default units for the
parameter is in meters; frequency units are allowed.
4-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
CALCulate Subsystem Commands
CALCulate:MARKer:SRANge[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1
CALCulate:MARKer:SRANge[:STATe]?
ON
OFF
Turns the search range
or
for all the markers. When the search range is
ON
, all the marker maximum/minimum searches will be within the upper and
lower wavelength range. Although there is a single range controlling the total
power integration, the marker search range, the mean calculation, and the
wavelength sweep range, there are four independent state settings for limiting
the total power integration, the marker search, the mean calculation, and the
wavelength sweep to the range. If all four states for the total power integra-
tion, the marker search, the mean calculation, and the wavelength sweep
OFF
ON
range are
, setting CALCulate:MARKer:SRANge:STATe to
will initialize
span
3
span
3
------------
start + 2 ×
start + ------------
the lower range to
and the upper range to
.
CALCulate:MARKer:SRANge:UPPer?
Returns the upper limit for the marker search range. The range used for the
marker search range is the same range used for the total power calculation,
the trace mean range, and the wavelength sweep range. The return value is in
meters, unless span is set to zero, in which case the return value is in seconds.
CALCulate:MARKer:SRANge:UPPer:FREQuency <param>
Sets the upper limit for the marker search range. Setting this value when
OFF
CALCulate:MARKer:SRANge:STATe is
will automatically turn
ON
CALCulate:MARKer:SRANge:STATe . The range used for the marker search
range is the same range used for the total power calculation, the trace mean
range, and the wavelength sweep range. Changing the range with this com-
mand will change all four ranges. Sending the command when the instrument
is in a zero span will generate a “Settings conflict” error. The default units for
the parameter is in Hertz.
4-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
CALCulate Subsystem Commands
CALCulate:MARKer:SRANge:UPPer:TIME <param>
Sets the upper limit for the marker search range. Setting this value when
OFF
CALCulate:MARKer:SRANge:STATe is
will automatically turn
ON
CALCulate:MARKer:SRANge:STATe . The range used for the marker search
range is the same range used for the total power calculation, the trace mean
range, and the wavelength sweep range. Changing the range with this com-
mand will change all four ranges. Sending this command while span is not set
to zero will result in a “Settings conflict” error. Default units for the parameter
is in seconds.
CALCulate:MARKer:SRANge:UPPer[:WAVelength] <param>
Sets the upper limit for the marker search range. Setting this value when
OFF
CALCulate:MARKer:SRANge:STATe is
will automatically turn
ON
CALCulate:MARKer:SRANge:STATe . The range used for the marker search
range is the same range used for the total power calculation, the trace mean
range, and the wavelength sweep range. Changing the range with this com-
mand will change all four ranges. Sending the command when the instrument
is in a zero span will generate a “Settings conflict” error. Default units for the
parameter is in meters; frequency units are allowed.
CALCulate:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:SRLevel
Sets the reference level to the amplitude of the marker.
CALCulate:MARKer[1|2|3|4][:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1
CALCulate:MARKer[1|2|3|4][:STATe]?
ON
OFF
Turns a particular marker
or
. If no number is given for the MARKer
ON
node, 1 is assumed. (For example, CALCulate:MARKer
will turn marker 1
ON
.) The marker will be placed on the trace determined by the
CALCulate:MARKer:TRACe command. If no trace is specified, the default
trace is trace A. The marker will be placed at the center wavelength. Turning a
OFF
marker
will turn off any marker function that was on for that particular
ON
marker. When the marker is turned
marker will be off.
again, all the marker functions for that
4-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
CALCulate Subsystem Commands
CALCulate:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:TRACe TRA|TRB|TRC|TRD|TRE|TRF
CALCulate:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:TRACe?
Places the marker on a particular trace.
CALCulate:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:X?
ON
Returns the X-axis value of the normal marker. When the delta function is
,
the absolute X-axis value of the delta marker is returned. When the bandwidth
ON
function is , the X-axis value of the center marker is returned.
The units of the value returned by the query is determined by the
CALCulate:MARKer:X:READout state. For READout of FREQuency, the units
returned are in Hertz. For READout of WAVelength, the units returned are
meters. For READout of TIME, the units are in seconds.
OFF
Sending the query when the specified marker is
will generate a “Settings
conflict” error.
CALCulate:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:X:FREQuency <numeric_value>
ON
Sets the X-axis value of the normal marker. When the delta function is , the
absolute X-axis value of the delta marker is controlled. When the bandwidth
ON
function is , the X-axis value of the center marker is controlled.
OFF
Sending the command when the specified marker is
will turn the marker
ON
and place the marker at the desired position. Sending the command when
the instrument is in a zero span will generate a “Settings conflict” error.
CALCulate:MARKer:X:READout FREQuency|WAVelength|TIME
CALCulate:MARKer:X:READout?
Sets the X-axis readout for frequency or wavelength when the instrument is in
a non-zero span. This setting controls only the normal marker X-axis and the
delta reference readout. The bandwidth and delta offset markers have their
own settings. This setting controls all four normal markers.
Trying to set the READout to TIME when in a non-zero span generates a “Set-
tings conflict” error. Trying to set the READout to FREQuency or WAVelength
when in zero span also generate a "Settings conflict" error. When the instru-
ment is set to zero span, the readout will automatically change to TIME. This
command is primarily useful for non-zero spans.
4-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
CALCulate Subsystem Commands
CALCulate:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:X:TIME <numeric_value>
Sets the X-axis value of the normal marker when the instrument is in zero
ON
span. When the delta function is , the absolute X-axis value of the delta
ON
marker is controlled. When the bandwidth function is , the X-axis value of
the center marker is controlled. The default units of the parameter is seconds.
OFF
Sending the command when the specified marker is
will turn the marker
ON
and place the marker at the desired position. Sending the command when
the instrument is in a non-zero span will generate a “Settings conflict” error.
CALCulate:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:X[:WAVelength] <numeric_value>
Sets the X-axis value of the normal marker in wavelength units. When the
ON
delta function is , the absolute X-axis value of the delta marker is con-
ON
trolled. When the bandwidth function is , the X-axis value of the center
marker is controlled. The default units of the parameter are meters.
OFF
Sending the command when the specified marker is
will turn the marker
ON
and place the marker at the desired position. Sending the command when
the instrument is in a zero span will generate a “Settings conflict” error.
CALCulate:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:Y?
ON
Returns the Y-axis value of the normal marker. When the delta function is
,
the value returned is the absolute Y-axis value of the delta marker. When the
ON
bandwidth function is , the value returned is the Y-axis value of the center
marker.
Sending the command when the specified marker is off will generate a “Set-
tings conflict” error.
4-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
CALCulate Subsystem Commands
CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:MATH[:EXPRession][:DEFine] (<expression>)
CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:MATH[:EXPRession][:DEFine]?
<expression> ::=
<operator> ::=
<trace_name><operator><trace_name>[<operator><numeric_value>]
+|–|*|/
Note
The parentheses in the above expression are required for proper operation of this com-
mand.
Defines a math expression to be used when the math operations are turned
ON
. The <expression> can contain a <trace_name> as operands. The math
operations will be performed in linear units. If, for example, the desired opera-
tion is TRA – TRB in log units, the expression should be defined as TRA / TRB.
Each CALCulate subsystem can have one expression defined. Recursive
expressions are not allowed.
Example Statements:
For the equivalent of the front panel C = Alog – B key:
OUTPUT 723 "CALC3:MATH:EXPR (TRA / TRB)"
For the equivalent of the front panel C = Alog + B key:
OUTPUT 723 "CALC3:MATH:EXPR (TRA * TRB)"
For the equivalent of the front panel C = Alin – B key:
OUTPUT 723 "CALC3:MATH:EXPR (TRA – TRB)"
For the equivalent of the front panel C = Alin + B key:
OUTPUT 723 "CALC3:MATH:EXPR (TRA + TRB)"
For the equivalent of the front panel F = Clog – D key:
OUTPUT 723 "CALC6:MATH:EXPR (TRC / TRD)"
Note
CALC1 controls TRA, CALC2 controls TRB, CALC3 controls TRC, CALC4 controls TRD,
CALC5 controls TRE, and CALC6 controls TRF.
4-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
CALCulate Subsystem Commands
CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:MATH:STATe OFF|ON|0|1
CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:MATH:STATe
Determines whether or not math processing is done.
CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:MAXimum:CLEar
Clears the current maximum hold values for the trace and allows a new maxi-
mum hold to occur. The trace will be initialized to a very negative dBm value
(–300 dBm). If the specified trace is not in the maximum hold state, this com-
mand will have no effect.
CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:MAXimum[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1
CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:MAXimum[:STATe]?
ON
OFF
Turns maximum hold on a trace
or
. The maximum hold operation com-
pares the current amplitude value of each point on a trace in the current
sweep to the corresponding point detected during the previous sweep, then
stores the maximum value. The CALCulate:AVERage, CALCulate:MAXimum,
and CALCulate:MINimum states are mutually exclusive. Each trace can have
ON
only one of these functions on at a time. Turning CALCulate:MAXimum
will
OFF
automatically turn CALCulate:AVERage and CALCulate:MINimum
. Each
trace is allowed to have a different CALC block turned on. For example,
ON
ON
CALCulate1:MAXimum , CALCulate2:MINimum , CALCulate3:AVERage
ON
will put trace A in maximum hold, trace B in minimum hold and trace C in
trace average mode.
OFF
If the math expression with the corresponding CALCulate subopcode is
,
then the SENSe:DATA is used for the maximum hold operation. If the math
ON
expression is , the result of the math expression is used for the maximum
hold operation.
4-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
CALCulate Subsystem Commands
CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:MEAN[:DATA]?
Returns the arithmetic mean of the trace associated with the subopcode of the
CALCulate node. The points of the trace are summed in linear units and the
sum is divided by the number of points. When the CALCulate:MEAN:RANge is
ON
, the mean is calculated over the upper and lower X-axis range limits. If the
OFF
CALCulate:MEAN:RANge is
, the mean is calculated over the entire trace.
OFF
Sending this query when the CALCulate:MEAN:STATe is
will generate a
"Settings conflict" error. The MEAN calculation is performed at the end of
sweep. Sending this query when the instrument is in the middle of a sweep
previous
will return the MEAN calculated for the
sweep.
CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:MEAN:RANGe:LOWer?
This query returns the lower X-axis limit for the trace mean range calculation.
The range used for the trace mean range is the same range used for the total
power calculation, the marker search range, and the wavelength sweep range.
The return value is in meters, unless the span is set to zero, in which case the
return value is in seconds.
CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:MEAN:RANGe:LOWer:FREQuency <numeric_value>[HZ|KHZ|MHZ|GHZ|THZ]
Sets the lower X-axis limit for the trace mean range calculation. Setting this
OFF
value when CALCulate:MEAN:RANGe:STATe is
will automatically turn
ON
CALCulate:MEAN:RANGe:STATe
.
The range used for the trace mean range is the same range used for the total
power calculation, the marker search range, and the wavelength sweep range.
Changing the range with this command will change all four ranges. Default
units for the parameters are Hertz.
Sending this command when the instrument is in a zero span will generate a
“Settings conflict” error.
4-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
CALCulate Subsystem Commands
CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:MEAN:RANGe:LOWer:TIME <numeric_value>[NS|US|MS|S]
Sets the lower X-axis limit for the trace mean range calculation. Setting this
OFF
value when CALCulate:MEAN:RANGe:STATe is
will automatically turn
ON
CALCulate:MEAN:RANGe:STATe
.
The range used for the trace mean range is the same range used for the total
power calculation, the marker search range, and the wavelength sweep range.
Changing the range with this command will change all four ranges. Default
units for the parameters are seconds.
Sending this command while span is not set to zero will result in a “Settings
Conflict” error.
CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:MEAN:RANGe:LOWer[:WAVelength] <numeric_value>[M|UM|NM|A]
This command sets the lower X-axis limit for the trace mean range calculation.
OFF
Setting this value when CALCulate:MEAN:RANGe:STATe is
will automati-
ON
cally turn CALCulate:MEAN:RANGe:STATe
.
The range used for the trace mean range is the same range used for the total
power calculation, the marker search range, and the wavelength sweep range.
Changing the range with this command will change all four ranges.
Sending this command when the instrument is in a zero span will generate a
“Settings conflict” error. Default units for the parameter are meters. Fre-
quency units are also allowed.
CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:MEAN:RANGe[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1
CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:MEAN:RANGe[:STATe]?
ON
OFF
Turns the trace mean calculation range
or
for all traces. Turning the
ON
ON
calculation range
will also turn the CALCulate:MEAN:STATe
for the
specified trace (the trace is specified via its subopcode). There is a single
range controlling the total power integration, the trace mean range, the
marker search range, and the wavelength sweep range, but there are four
independent state settings for limiting the total power calculation, the trace
mean calculation, the marker search, and the wavelength sweep to the range.
4-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
CALCulate Subsystem Commands
CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:MEAN:RANGe:UPPer?
This query returns the upper X-axis limit for the trace mean range calculation.
The range used for the trace mean range is the same range used for the total
power calculation, the marker search range, and the wavelength sweep range.
The returned value is in meters, unless the span is set to zero, in which case
the returned value is in seconds.
CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:MEAN:RANGe:UPPer:FREQuency <numeric_value>[HZ|KHZ|MHZ|GHZ|THZ]
Sets the upper X-axis limit for the trace mean range calculation. Setting this
OFF
value when CALCulate:MEAN:RANGe:STATe is
will automatically turn
ON
CALCulate:MEAN:RANGe:STATe . The range used for the trace mean range
is the same range used for the total power calculation, the marker search
range, and the wavelength sweep range. Changing the range with this com-
mand will change all four ranges. Default units for the parameter are Hertz.
CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:MEAN:RANGe:UPPer:TIME <numeric_value>[NS|US|MS|S]
This command sets the upper limit for the trace mean range calculation. Set-
OFF
ting this value when CALCulate:MEAN:RANGe:STATe is
will automatically
ON
turn CALCulate:MEAN:RANGe:STATe . The range used for the trace mean
range is the same range used for the total power calculation, the marker
search range, and the wavelength sweep range. Changing the range with this
command will change all four ranges. Default units for the parameter are sec-
onds.
Sending this command while span is not set to zero will result in a “Settings
Conflict” error.
CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:MEAN:RANGe:UPPer[:WAVelength] <numeric_value>[M|UM|NM|A]
This command sets the upper X-axis limit for the trace mean range calcula-
OFF
tion. Setting this value when CALCulate:MEAN:RANGe:STATe is
will auto-
ON
matically turn CALCulate:MEAN:RANGe:STATe . The range used for the
trace mean range is the same range used for the total power calculation, the
marker search range, and the wavelength sweep range. Changing the range
with this command will change all four ranges. Default units for the parameter
are meters.
Sending the command when the instrument is in a zero span will generate a
“Settings conflict” error.
4-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
CALCulate Subsystem Commands
CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:MEAN:STATe OFF|ON|0|1
CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:MEAN:STATe?
ON
OFF
Turns the mean power calculation for a trace
or
. Only one mean power
calculation can be turned on at a time. For example, if a mean power calcula-
tion is being performed on trace A, turning a mean power calculation for
ON
OFF
trace B
will turn the calculation for trace A
.
CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:MINimum:CLEar
Clears the current minimum hold values for the trace and allows a new mini-
mum hold to occur. The trace will be initialized to the current value of the
trace. If the specified trace is not in the minimum hold state, sending this com-
mand will have no effect.
CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:MINimum[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1
CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:MINimum[:STATe]?
ON
OFF
Turns minimum hold for a trace
or
. The minimum hold operation com-
pares the current amplitude value of each point on a trace in the current
sweep to the corresponding point detected during the previous sweep, then
stores the minimum value. The CALCulate:AVERage, CALCulate:MAXimum,
and CALCulate:MINimum states are mutually exclusive. Each trace can have
ON
only one of these functions on at a time. Turning CALCulate:MINimum
will
. Each
OFF
automatically turn CALCulate:AVERage and CALCulate:MAXimum
trace can have a different CALC block turned on. For example,
ON
ON
CALCulate1:MAXimum , CALCulate2:MINimum , CALCulate3:AVERage
ON
will put trace A in maximum hold, trace B in minimum hold, and trace C in
trace average mode.
OFF
If the math expression with the corresponding CALCulate subopcode is
then the SENSe:DATA is used for the minimum hold operation. If the math
,
ON
expression is , the result of the math expression is used for the minimum
hold operation.
CALCulate:THReshold <param>[W|MW|UW|DBM]
CALCulate:THReshold?
Sets the value for the marker search threshold.
4-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
CALCulate Subsystem Commands
CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:THReshold:STATe ON|OFF|1|0
CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:THREshold:STATe?
Turns on the marker search threshold function. When this threshold function
ON
is , marker peak searches will ignore peaks below the threshold value.
CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:TPOWer[:DATA]?
Returns the total power of the specified trace. Trace A corresponds to
CALCulate1, trace B to CALCulate2, and so on. Corrections to the total power
are made for the slope and variation of the resolution bandwidth filter over the
ON
wavelength range of the trace. When the CALCulate:TPOWer:IRANge is
,
the total power is calculated over the upper and lower range limits; otherwise,
the total power is calculated over the entire trace. Sending this query when
OFF
the CALCulate:TPOWer:STATe is
will generate a "Settings conflict" error.
CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:TPOWer:IRANge:LOWer <numeric_value>[M|UM|NM|A|HZ|KHZ|MHZ|GHZ|THZ]
CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:TPOWer:IRANge:LOWer?
Sets the lower X-axis limit for the total power integration range for all traces.
OFF
Setting this value when the CALCulate:TPOWer:IRANge[:STATe] is
will
ON
automatically turn the CALCulate:TPOWer:IRANge[:STATe] . The range
used for the total power integration is the same range used for the marker
search range, the trace mean range, and the wavelength range. Changing the
range with this command will change all four ranges.
Default units for the parameter are meters. Sending the command when the
instrument is in a zero span will generate a “Settings conflict” error.
4-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
CALCulate Subsystem Commands
CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:TPOWer:IRANge[STATe] OFF|ON|0|1
CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:TPOWer:IRANge[STATe]?
ON
OFF
Turns the total power calculation range for all traces
or
. Setting
ON
ON
IRANge:STATe to
will set the corresponding TPOWer:STATe to
.
Although there is a single range controlling the total power integration, the
trace mean calculation, the marker search range, and the wavelength sweep
range, there are four independent state settings for limiting the total power
calculation, the trace mean, the marker search, and the wavelength sweep to
the range. If all four states for the total power integration, the trace mean, the
OFF
marker search, and the wavelength sweep range are
, setting the CALCu-
span
ON
start + ------------
and the
late:TPOWer:STATe to , will initialize the lower limit to
3
span
3
start + 2 × ------------
upper limit to
.
Sending the command when the instrument is in a zero span will generate a
“Settings conflict” error.
CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:TPOWer:IRANge:UPPer <numeric_value>[M|UM|NM|A|HZ|KHZ|MHZ|GHZ|THZ]
CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:TPOWer:IRANge:UPPer?
Sets the upper X-axis limit of the total power integration range for all traces.
OFF
Setting this value when the CALCulate:TPOWer:IRANge[:STATe] is
will
ON
automatically turn the CALCulate:TPOWer:IRANge[:STATe] . The range
used for the total power calculation is the same range used for the marker
search range, the trace mean range and the wavelength range. Changing the
range with this command will change all four ranges.
Default units for the parameter are meters. Sending the command when the
instrument is in a zero span will generate a “Settings conflict” error.
CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:TPOWer:STATe OFF|ON|0|1
CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:TPOWer:STATe?
ON
OFF
Turns the total power calculation for a trace
or
. Only one total power
calculation can be turned on at a time. For example, if a total power calcula-
tion is being performed on trace A, turning a total power calculation for
ON
OFF
ON
trace B
will turn the calculation for trace A
. Turning this function
in
zero span generates a “Settings conflict” error.
4-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
CALibration Subsystem Commands
CALibration Subsystem Commands
CALibration:ALIGn
Performs an automatic alignment of the instrument at the wavelength of the
largest signal found in full span. This aligns the monochrometer output with
the photodetector for improved amplitude accuracy. Sending this command
with a marker on screen will generate a “Settings conflict” error. See page 3-3
for additional information on this function.
CALibration:ALIGn:MARKer[1|2|3|4]
Performs an automatic alignment of the instrument at the wavelength of the
specified marker. This aligns the monochrometer output with the photodetec-
tor for improved amplitude accuracy. Sending this command without the spec-
ified marker on will generate a “Settings conflict” error.
CALibration:ALIGn:EXTernal
Performs an alignment of the instrument using an external broadband source.
The instrument performs an alignment at each of several wavelengths and
stores the values in a wavelength alignment table. This results in improved
amplitude accuracy.
CALibration:ALIGn:PRESET
Sets the alignment of the instrument to the preset factory-calibrated values.
CALibration:DATE?
Returns the date of the most recent factory calibration.
4-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
CALibration Subsystem Commands
CALibration:POWer
Performs a power calibration. The calibration is aborted if the power mea-
sured on the input signal is more than 3 dB higher or 10 dB lower than the
value specified in the CALibration:POWer:VALue command.
CALibration:POWer:DATE?
Returns the date of the most recent power calibration.
CALibration:POWer:STATe OFF|ON|0|1
CALibration:POWer:STATe?
Specifies whether or not the calibration power data is applied. Amplitude
ON
accuracy is only specified with power calibration
.
CALibration:POWer:VALue <param>
CALibration:POWer:VALue?
Specifies the power to be used for calibration. Default units are set by the
UNITs:POWer command.
CALibration:POWer:WAVelength <numeric_value>[M|UM|NM|A|HZ|KHZ|MHZ|GHZ]
CALibration:POWer:WAVelength?
Specifies the wavelength of the signal used for the amplitude calibration.
CALibration:PRESet
Presets the calibration of the instrument to factory-calibrated values. This
cancels the effect of any previous CALibration:POWer or CALibration:WAVe-
length.
CALibration:STATe OFF|ON|0|1
CALibration:STATe?
Specifies if the calibration data is applied or not. Amplitude accuracy and
ON
wavelength accuracy are only specified when calibration is . The response
AND
value is the logical
of CALibration:POWer:STATe? and CALibra-
tion:WAVelength:STATe?.
4-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
CALibration Subsystem Commands
CALibration:WAVelength
Performs a wavelength calibration. If the wavelength measured on the input
signal differs more than 2.5 nm from the value specified in the CALibra-
tion:WAVelength:VALue command, the calibration is aborted.
CALibration:WAVelength:DATE?
Returns the date of the most recent wavelength calibration.
CALibration:WAVelength:MARKer[1|2|3|4]
Performs a wavelength calibration using the wavelength of the marker as the
reference. If the wavelength of the marker differs more than 2.5 nm from the
value specified in the CALibration:WAVelength:VALue command, the calibra-
ON
tion is aborted. If this marker is not , this command generates a “Settings
conflict” error.
CALibration:WAVelength:STATe OFF|ON|0|1
CALibration:WAVelength:STATe?
Specifies whether or not the calibration wavelength data is applied. Wave-
ON
length accuracy is only specified with wavelength calibration
.
CALibration:WAVelength:VALue <param>[M|UM|NM|A]
CALibration:WAVelength:VALue?
Specifies the wavelength for calibration. Default units for the parameter are
meters.
CALibration:ZERO[:AUTO] OFF|ON|0|1|ONCE
CALibration:ZERO[:AUTO]?
Specifies whether or not autozeroing is enabled. Autozeroing measures and
compensates for the dark current of the photodetector for improved ampli-
ONCE
tude accuracy. The
parameter causes the dark current to be measured
all
one time, and then the resulting correction is applied to
subsequent mea-
ON
surements. Autozeroing
causes the dark current to be measured between
sweeps, and then the resulting correction is applied to the next sweep.
4-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
DISPlay Subsystem Commands
DISPlay Subsystem Commands
DISPlay[:WINDow[1]]:ANNotation[:ALL] ON|OFF|0|1
DISPlay[:WINDow[1]]:ANNotation[:ALL]?
ON
OFF
Turns the screen annotation
or
. Affects only the X-axis and Y-axis
labeling and labeling within the graticule.
DISPlay[:WINDow[1]]:TEXT:CLEar
Erases all text on the display resulting from previous use of the DISPlay[:WIN-
Dow[1]]:TEXT:DATA command.
DISPlay[:WINDow[1]]:TEXT:DATA <string>|<data_block>
DISPlay[:WINDow[1]]:TEXT:DATA?
Writes text on the display in the Title area. Use the <data_block> parameter to
send extended ASCII characters such as control codes and symbols.
DISPlay[:WINDow[1]]:TRACe:ALL[:SCALe][:AUTO]
Finds the largest input signal using trace A and sets the span and vertical scale
to display that signal. This command performs the same function as the front-
Auto-Meas
panel
key.
The following defines the instrument state settings altered by Auto Measure.
State settings that are not listed are not altered.
Because many instrument state setting are altered, it is recommended you use
this command only to find unknown signals. It is not recommend this com-
mand be used in the middle of a measurement routine.
Center Wavelength
Span
According to signal wavelength and bandwidth
Set according to automeasure setup panel. In some cases, this
may also be a function of signal characteristics.
Grating Order
Auto
4-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
DISPlay Subsystem Commands
Sensitivity
dB/div
Set according to automeasure setup panel. In some cases, this
may also be a function of signal characteristics.
Set according to automeasure setup panel. In some cases, this
may also be a function of signal characteristics.
Video Bandwidth
Auto Range Enable
Trans-Z Lock
Auto
On
Off
Repetitive Sweep
Sweep Time
On (front panel), Off (remote control)
Auto
Auto Chop Mode
Gated Sweep Enable
Sweep Trigger Mode
Trace Length
On
Off
Internal
1001
Wavelength Limit
Reference Level
On
According to signal amplitude
Linear Display Mode
Resolution Bandwidth
Res-BW to Span Ratio
Peak Search on EOS
Line Markers
Trace Integration Limit
Search Limit
Trace Integration
Trace Mean Calculation
Off
According to signal characteristics
0.01
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
For each trace, except trace A:
Trace Math
Update
Off
Off
View
Off
Hold Mode
Averaging
None
Off
Trace A is identical, except:
Update
View
On
On
4-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
DISPlay Subsystem Commands
For each marker, except marker 1:
Visibility
Off
Marker BW
Delta Mode
Marker Trace
Noise Marker
Off
Off
Trace A
Off
Marker 1 is identical, except when the final span is non-zero as follows:
Visibility
On
Wavelength
Highest point on selected signal
DISPlay[:WINDow[1]]:TRACe:ALL[:SCALe][:AUTO]:MARKer OFF|ON|0|1
DISPlay[:WINDow[1]]:TRACe:ALL[:SCALe][:AUTO]:MARKer?
Changes the DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:ALL:SCALe:AUTO command to find
the input signal closest to the marker and set span and vertical scale to view
that signal.
DISPlay[:WINDow[1]]:TRACe:ALL[:SCALe][:AUTO]:OPTimize OFF|ON|0|1
DISPlay[:WINDow[1]]:TRACe:ALL[:SCALe][:AUTO]:OPTimize?
Changes the DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:ALL:SCALe:AUTO command to opti-
mize sensitivity after finding the input signal. Also sets single sweep mode.
DISPlay[:WINDow[1]]:TRACe:GRATicule:GRID[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1
DISPlay[:WINDow[1]]:TRACe:GRATicule:GRID[:STATe]?
ON OFF
Turns the graticule
or
.
DISPlay[:WINDow[1]]:TRACe[:STATe] TRA|TRB|TRC|TRD|TRE|TRF,OFF|ON|0|1
DISPlay[:WINDow[1]]:TRACe[:STATe]? TRA|TRB|TRC|TRD|TRE|TRF
ON
OFF
Turns the trace display
or
. Specifying any trace other than the ones
listed will generate an “Illegal parameter value” error.
4-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
DISPlay Subsystem Commands
DISPlay[:WINDow[1]]:TRACe:X[:SCALe]:AUTO:SPAN <numeric_value>[M|NM|UM]
DISPlay[:WINDow[1]]:TRACe:X[:SCALe]:AUTO:SPAN?
Specifies the final span after a DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:ALL:SCALe:AUTO
command.
DISPlay[:WINDow[1]]:TRACe:X[:SCALe]:AUTO:SPAN:AUTO ON|OFF|1|0
DISPlay[:WINDow[1]]:TRACe:X[:SCALe]:AUTO:SPAN:AUTO?
Specifies whether the final span after a DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:ALL: SCALe:
AUTO command should be set automatically, based on properties of the mea-
sured signal.
DISPlay[:WINDow[1]]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:AUTO:PDIVision <numeric_value>[DB]
DISPlay[:WINDow[1]]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:AUTO:PDIVision?
Specifies the final vertical scale after performing a DISPlay:WIN-
Dow:TRACe:ALL:SCALe:AUTO command.
DISPlay[:WINDow[1]]:TRACe:Y[1|2][:SCALe]:AUTO:PDIVision:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1
DISPlay[:WINDow[1]]:TRACe:Y[1|2][:SCALe]:AUTO:PDIVision:AUTO?
Specifies whether the final vertical scale after a DISPlay:WIN-
Dow:TRACe:ALL:SCALe:AUTO command should be adjusted automatically,
based on signal properties. Y1 refers to the left (power) scale, and Y2 refers to
the right (ratio) scale.
DISPlay[:WINDow[1]]:TRACe:Y[1|2][:SCALe]:LINear OFF|ON|0|1
DISPlay[:WINDow[1]]:TRACe:Y[1|2][:SCALe]:LINear?
Specifies whether the vertical scale is in linear units or in log units. Y1 refers
to the left (power) scale, and Y2 refers to the right (ratio) scale.
4-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
DISPlay Subsystem Commands
DISPlay[:WINDow[1]]:TRACe:Y[1|2][:SCALe]:PDIVision <numeric_value>[DB]
DISPlay[:WINDow[1]]:TRACe:Y[1|2][:SCALe]:PDIVision?
Specifies the dB per division of the vertical scale. Y1 refers to the left (power)
scale, and Y2 refers to the right (ratio) scale.
The maximum value for the vertical scale is 20 dB per division for the power scale or the
ratio scale. The minimum value is 0.01 dB per division. The Preset value is 10 dB per divi-
sion.
DISPlay[:WINDow[1]]:TRACe:Y[1|2][:SCALe]:RLEVel <numeric_value>[DBM|W|UW|NW|MW|DB]
DISPlay[:WINDow[1]]:TRACe:Y[1|2][:SCALe]:RLEVel?
Specifies the power value of the reference level. Default units are set by the
UNIT:POWer command for Y1 and the UNIT:RATio command for Y2.
The maximum value for the power reference level is the equivalent of +300 dBm. The
minimum value is –300 dBm. The Preset value for the power reference level is 0 dBm.
The maximum value for the ratio reference level is 270 dB. The minimum value is
–330 dB. The Preset value for the ratio reference level is 0 dB.
DISPlay[:WINDow[1]]:TRACe:Y[1|2}[:SCALe]:RPOSition <numeric value>
DISPlay[:WINDow[1]]:TRACe:Y[1|2][:SCALe]:RPOSition?
Selects the position at which the reference level is displayed. The top and bot-
tom graticule lines correspond to 10 and 0, respectively. The default is 9.
DISPlay[:WINDow[1]]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:SPACing LINear|LOGarithmic
DISPlay[:WINDow[1]]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:SPACing?
Specifies the scaling of the vertical axis as logarithmic or linear. In LOG scale,
the scale in dB per division is specified by the DISPlay[:WINDow[1]]:TRACe
:Y[:SCALe]:PDIVision command.
4-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
FORMat Subsystem Commands
FORMat Subsystem Commands
FORMat[:DATA] REAL[,64]|ASCii
FORMat[:DATA]?
Specifies the trace data format used during data transfer via HP-IB. This com-
mand affects data transfers for the TRACe[:DATA] subsystem. The ASCII for-
mat is a comma-separated list of numbers. The REAL format is a definite-
length block of 64-bit floating-point binary numbers. The definite-length block
is defined by IEEE 488.2: a "#" character, followed by one digit (in ASCII)
specifying the number of length bytes to follow, followed by the length (in
ASCII), followed by length bytes of binary data. The binary data is a sequence
of 8-byte (64-bit) floating point numbers.
4-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
HCOPy Subsystem Commands
HCOPy Subsystem Commands
HCOPy:DATA?
Returns the currently defined printer output as an indefinite length block.
After removing the #0 prefix and newline suffix, this block can be saved by the
controller and sent directly to a suitable printer.
HCOPy:DESTination “SYSTem:COMMunicate:INTernal”|”SYStem:COMMunicate:CENtronics”
HCOPy:DESTination?
Selects the I/O port for hard copy output. This affects subsequent presses of
Print
the
key and the HCOPy[:IMMediate] command.
HCOPy[:IMMediate]
The entire screen is output to the port defined by the HCOPy:DESTination
Print
command. This is equivalent to pressing the
key.
4-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
MMEMory Subsystem Commands
MMEMory Subsystem Commands
MMEMory:CATalog? [INTernal|FLOPpy]
Lists all files in the current directory. The return data will be formatted as:
<mem_used>,<mem_free> {,<file listing>}
Each <file listing> indicates the name, type, and size of one file in the direc-
tory list:
<file_name>,<file_type>,<file_size>
MMEMory:DATA <file_name>,<data_block>
MMEMory:DATA? <file_name>
Stores <data_block> in the memory location <file_name>. The query response
is the <data_block> stored in <file_name>, where <data_block> is an indefi-
nite block.
MMEMory:DELete <file_name> [,INTernal|FLOPpy]
Deletes the specified file.
MMEMory:INITialize [FLOPpy]
Formats a disk in the instrument’s 3.5 inch disk drive.
MMEMory:LOAD:TRACe TRA|TRB|TRC|TRD|TRE|TRF,<file_name> [,INTernal|FLOPpy]
Loads the specified trace from mass storage.
MMEMory:STORe:TRACe TRA|TRB|TRC|TRD|TRE|TRF,<file_name> [,INTernal|FLOPpy]
Stores the specified trace to mass storage.
4-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
SENSe Subsystem Commands
SENSe Subsystem Commands
[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution] <numeric_value>[M|NM|UM|A]
[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]?
Sets the resolution bandwidth. Available resolution bandwidths are 10 nm,
5 nm, 2 nm, 1 nm, and either 0.07 nm or 0.06 nm. The narrowest resolution
bandwidth in 0.7 nm on the HP 86140A and 86143A. It is 0.06 nm on the
HP 86142A and 86145A.
In the AUTO coupled setting, the resolution bandwidth is controlled by the chosen wave-
length span and the value set for [SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:RATio.
[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1
[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:AUTO?
Couples the resolution bandwidth to the wavelength span. SENSe:BAND-
span × resolution band-
ON
width:AUTO
width ratio
sets the resolution bandwidth to
.
The Preset state of the resolution bandwidth coupling is AUTO.
[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:RATio <numeric_value>
[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:RATio?
Specifies the ratio of the resolution bandwidth to the span. This parameter is
multiplied by the span width to determine the automatic setting of the resolu-
tion bandwidth. The default ratio is .01.
4-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
SENSe Subsystem Commands
[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo <numeric_value> [HZ|KHZ|MHZ|GHZ]
[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo?
Specifies the bandwidth of the post-detection video filter. The minimum value
for the video bandwidth is 0.1 Hz. The maximum value is the lesser between
3 kHz and the bandwidth of the currently selected transimpedance amplifier.
Available choices move in a 1, 3, 10 sequence.
[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1
[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo:AUTO?
[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo:AUTO
The
command enables and disables
automatic coupling of the video bandwidth.
Video bandwidth filtering occurs after detection of the light. In the autocou-
pled mode, the video bandwidth has an extremely wide range. This allows the
optical spectrum analyzer to avoid unnecessary filtering that would reduce the
sweep speed more than required.
Normally, the video bandwidth is coupled to the sensitivity. Manually entering
a video bandwidth breaks this coupling. The video bandwidth can be manually
set from 100 MHz to 3 kHz, or the bandwidth of the currently selected tran-
simpedance amplifier, whichever is less.
The following functions affect video bandwidth:
• Changing the sensitivity value.
• Changing the reference level.
ON
OFF
• Turning autoranging
or
.
Auto
The range of video bandwidth available in
mode is much greater than can
be set manually from the front panel. A lower value of video bandwidth
requires a longer sweep time. Because of the interdependence between the
video bandwidth and sensitivity, it is recommended that either the sensitivity
or
the video bandwidth be changed, whichever is the most important to the
measurement task being performed.
Because of the interdependence of sensitivity and video bandwidth, these
parameters cannot be set individually. If one of the parameters is set manually,
the other is forced into Auto coupled mode and set by the instrument. Set
either the desired sensitivity or the desired video bandwidth, depending on
which parameter is most important to the current measurement task.
The Preset state of the video bandwidth coupling is AUTO.
4-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
SENSe Subsystem Commands
[SENSe:]CHOP[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1
[SENSe:]CHOP[:STATe]?
ON
OFF
Turns the spectrum analyzer chop mode
or
. Chop mode increases
dynamic range for long sweep times by subtracting ambient light.
[SENSe:]CORRection:RVELocity:MEDium AIR|VACuum
[SENse:]CORRection:RVELocity:MEDium?
Determines whether the wavelengths used and displayed are referenced to air
or vacuum.
[SENSe:]GORDer[:AUTO] OFF|ON|0|1
[SENSe:]GORDer[:AUTO]?
ON
Specifies the spectrum analyzer grating order mode. When , allows the
instrument to select the best reflection order for the wavelength range. When
OFF
causes the instrument to use the first-order reflection, regardless of the
wavelength.
[SENSe:]POWer[:DC]:RANGe:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1
[SENSe:]POWer[:DC]:RANGe:AUTO?
ON
OFF
Turns the automatic ranging feature
or
. For improved dynamic range,
automatic ranging changes the input range during the sweep.
Note
It is recommended this function be in AUTO mode.
[SENSe:]POWer[:DC]:RANGe:LOCK OFF|ON|0|1
[SENSe:]POWer[:DC]:RANGe:LOCK?
Locks the transimpedance amplifier to the currently selected range.
[SENSe:]POWer[:DC]:RANGe:LOWer <numeric_value>[DBM|W|UW|NM|MW]
[SENSe:]POWer[:DC]:RANGe:LOWer?
Specifies the desired value for sensitivity. Default units are set by the
UNITs:POWer command.
4-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
SENSe Subsystem Commands
The maximum value for Sensitivity is +300 dBm. The minimum value is the value that
causes the sweep time to become 1000 seconds, and is an attribute of each individual
optical spectrum analyzer. The minimum value will always be less than the values for
sensitivity shown in the Specifications section of the User’s Guide.
[SENSe:]POWer[:DC]:RANGe:LOWer:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1
[SENSe:]POWer[:DC]:RANGe:LOWer:AUTO?
ON
OFF
Turns the automatic setting of sensitivity
or
. Specifying a value for sen-
sitivity with the [SENSe]POWer[:DC]:RANGe:LOWer command will turn Auto
OFF
.
[SENSe:]SWEep:POINts <numeric_value>
[SENSe:]SWEep:POINts?
Sets the number of the data points acquired during a sweep. The minimum
number of data points is three and the maximum is 10001.
[SENSe:]SWEep:TIME <numeric_value>[US|MS|S]
[SENSe:]SWEep:TIME?
Specifies the time in which the spectrum analyzer sweeps the displayed wave-
length range.
[SENSe:]SWEep:TIME:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1
[SENSe:]SWEep:TIME:AUTO?
ON
When this function is , the sweep time is coupled to the trace length and the
span.
[SENSe:][WAVelength:]CENTer <numeric_value>[M|NM|UM|A|HZ|KHZ|MHZ|GHZ]
[SENSe:][WAVelength:]CENTer?
Specifies the center wavelength. The start and stop wavelength and, if neces-
sary, the span are adjusted so that:
Span
Center = Start + -------------
2
4-84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
SENSe Subsystem Commands
and
Span
2
Center = Stop – -------------""""
With Wavelength Limit Off, the minimum value for the Center Wavelength is nominally
350.1 nm. The maximum value is 1999.9 nm. These limits are valid for wavelengths ref-
erenced in air or vacuum.
With Wavelength Limit On, the minimum value for the Center Wavelength is nominally
600.1 nm. The maximum value is 1699.9 nm. These limits are valid for wavelengths ref-
erenced in air or vacuum.
The Preset value for Wavelength Limit is On. The Preset value for Center Wavelength is
1150 nm.
[SENSe:][WAVelength:]CENTer:STEP:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1
[SENSe:][WAVelength:]CENTer:STEP:AUTO?
ON
OFF
When , the step size is automatic. When
, the step size is fixed. The
value is set by the [SENSe:][WAVelength:]CENTer:STEP[:INCRement] com-
mand.
[SENSe:][WAVelength:]CENTer:STEP[:INCRement] <numeric_value>[M|NM|UM|A]
[SENSe:][WAVelength:]CENTer:STEP[:INCRement]?
Specifies the center wavelength step size.
[SENSe:][WAVelength:]LIMit OFF|ON|0|1
[SENSe:][WAVelength:]LIMit?
Specifies whether the span is limited to the specified range of 600 to 1700 nm.
[SENSe:][WAVelength:]OFFSet <numeric_value>[M|NM|UM|A]
[SENSe:][WAVelength:]OFFSet?
Specifies the wavelength offset. This is the offset between the measured
wavelength and the displayed wavelength.
4-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
SENSe Subsystem Commands
[SENSe:][WAVelength:]SPAN <numeric_value>[M|NM|UM|A]
[SENSe:][WAVelength:]SPAN?
Specifies the wavelength span. The start and stop wavelength and, if neces-
sary, the center wavelength are adjusted so that:
Span = 2(Center – Start)
and
Span = 2(Stop – Center)
The minimum value for Wavelength Span is 0.2 nm.
With Wavelength Limit Off, the maximum value for Wavelength Span is 1650 nm.
With Wavelength Limit On, the maximum value for Wavelength Span is 1100 nm.
The Preset value for Wavelength Limit is On. The Preset value for Wavelength Span is
1100 nm.
[SENSe:][WAVelength:]SPAN:FULL
Sets the wavelength span of the spectrum analyzer to full span.
[SENSe:][WAVelength:]SRANge:LOWer <numeric_value>[M|NM|UM|A|HZ|KHZ|MHZ|GHZ]
[SENSe:][WAVelength:]SRANge:LOWer?
Sets the lower limit for the wavelength sweep range. Setting this value when
OFF
SENSe:WAVelength:SRANge:STATe is
will automatically turn
ON
SENSe:WAVelength:SRANge:STATe . The range used for the wavelength
sweep range is the same range used for the total power integration, the trace
mean range, and the marker search range. Changing the range with this com-
mand will change all four ranges.
Sending the command when the instrument is in a zero span will generate a
“Settings conflict” error.
Default units for the parameter are meters. Frequency units are allowed.
4-86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
SENSe Subsystem Commands
[SENSe:][WAVelength:]SRANge[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1
[SENSe:][WAVelength:]SRANge[:STATe]?
ON
OFF
ON
Turns the wavelength sweep range
or
. When the sweep range is , the
instrument will only sweep between the upper and lower sweep range limits.
There is a single range controlling the total power integration, the trace mean
calculation, the marker search range, and the wavelength sweep range, but
there are four independent state settings for limiting the total power integra-
tion, the trace mean, the marker search, and the wavelength sweep to the
range. If all four states for the total power integration, the trace mean, the
OFF
marker search, and the wavelength sweep range are
, setting
ON
SENSe:WAVelength:SRANge:STATe to , will initialize
Span
3
Start + -------------
the lower limit to:
the upper limit to:
and
Span
-------------
3
Start + 2 ×
Sending the command when the instrument is in a zero span will generate a
“Settings conflict” error.
[SENSe:][WAVelength:]SRANge:UPPer <numeric_value>[M|NM|UM|A|HZ|KHZ|MHZ|GHZ]
[SENSe:][WAVelength:]SRANge:UPPer?
Sets the upper limit for the wavelength sweep range. Setting this value when
OFF
SENSe:WAVelength:SRANge:STATe is
will automatically turn
ON
SENSe:WAVelength:SRANge:STATe . The range used for the wavelength
sweep range is the same range used for the total power integration, the trace
mean range and the marker search range. Changing the range with this com-
mand will change all four ranges.
Sending the command when the instrument is in a zero span will generate a
“Settings conflict” error. Default units for the parameter are meters. Fre-
quency units are allowed.
4-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
SENSe Subsystem Commands
[SENSe:][WAVelength:]STARt <numeric_value>[M|NM|UM|A|HZ|KHZ|MHZ|GHZ]
[SENSe:][WAVelength:]STARt?
Specifies the start wavelength. The center wavelength and span are adjusted
so that:
Span
Start = Center – -------------
2
and
Span
Stop = Center + -------------
2
If the instrument is in zero span, this command sets the center wavelength to
the value specified.
With Wavelength Limit Off, the minimum value for the Start Wavelength is nominally
350 nm. The maximum value is 1999.8 nm. These limits are valid for wavelengths refer-
enced in air or vacuum.
With Wavelength Limit On, the minimum value for the Start Wavelength is nominally
600 nm. The maximum value is 1699.8 nm. These limits are valid for wavelengths refer-
enced in air or vacuum.
The Preset value for Wavelength Limit is On. The Preset value for Start Wavelength is
600 nm.
4-88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
SENSe Subsystem Commands
[SENSe:][WAVelength:]STOP <numeric_value>[M|NM|UM|A|HZ|KHZ|MHZ|GHZ]
[SENSe:][WAVelength:]STOP?
Specifies the stop wavelength. The center wavelength and span are adjusted
so that:
Span
Start = Center – -------------
2
and
Span
Stop = Center + -------------
2
If the instrument is in zero span, this command sets the center wavelength to
the value specified.
With Wavelength Limit Off, the minimum value for the Stop Wavelength is nominally
350.2 nm. The maximum value is 2000 nm. These limits are valid for wavelengths refer-
enced in air or vacuum.
With Wavelength Limit On, the minimum value for the Stop Wavelength is nominally
600.2 nm. The maximum value is 1700 nm. These limits are valid for wavelengths refer-
enced in air or vacuum.
The Preset value for Wavelength Limit is On. The Preset value for Stop Wavelength is
1700 nm.
4-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
SOURce[n] Subsystem Commands
SOURce[n] Subsystem Commands
SOURce[n]:PULSe:DCYCle <numeric_value>
SOURce[n]:PULSe:DCYCle?
Sets the duty cycle of the sync output. This is equivalent to the
TRIGger[:SEQuence]:OUTPut:PULSe:DCYCle command.
SOURce[n]:PULSe:WIDTh <numeric_value>[S|MS|US|NS]
SOURce[n]:PULSe:WIDTh?
Sets the pulse width of the sync output. This is equivalent to the
TRIGger[:SEQuence]:OUTPut:PULSe:WIDTh command.
4-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
STATus Subsystem Commands
STATus Subsystem Commands
STATus:OPERation:CONDition?
Queries the contents of the operation condition register.
STATus:OPERation:ENABle <int_value>
STATus:OPERation:ENABle?
Sets or queries the contents of the operation enable register.
STATus:OPERation[:EVENt]?
Queries the contents of the operation event register. This query reads the con-
tents of the register and then clears it.
STATus:OPERation:NTRansition <int_value>
STATus:OPERation:NTRansition?
Sets or queries the contents of the operation negative transition register.
STATus:OPERation:PTRansition <int_value>
STATus:OPERation:PTRansition?
Sets or queries the contents of the operation positive transition register.
STATus:PRESet
Clears the event registers and sets all bits in the enable registers.
STATus:QUEStionable:CONDition?
Queries the contents of the questionable condition register.
4-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
STATus Subsystem Commands
STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle <int_value>
STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle?
Sets or queries the contents of the questionable enable register.
STATus:QUEStionable:EVENt?
Queries the contents of the questionable event register and then clears it.
4-92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
SYSTem Subsystem Commands
SYSTem Subsystem Commands
SYSTem:DATE?
Queries the date of the real-time clock of the optical spectrum analyzer.
SYSTem:ERRor[:NEXT]?
Queries the earliest entry in the error queue, thus deleting it. The *CLS com-
mand clears the error queue.
SYSTem:HELP:HEADers?
Returns a list of all commands and queries implemented by the instrument.
SYSTem:PON[:TYPE] PRESet|LAST
SYSTem:PON[:TYPE]?
Selects the state of the optical spectrum analyzer when it is turned on.
SYSTem:PRESet
Performs an instrument preset, setting the instrument to a known state. See
page 3-5 for a complete list of the preset conditions.
SYSTem:TIME?
Queries the time of the real-time clock of the spectrum analyzer.
4-93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
SYSTem Subsystem Commands
SYSTem:TZONe:NAME?
Returns the time zone used by the real-time clock of the spectrum analyzer.
The time zone must be one of the following:
HST10
GMT0bst
WAT1
Hawaii Standard
Greenwich Mean/British Summer
Algeria, West Central Africa
Middle European/Daylight
Turkey, Finland, Romania, Greece
Egypt, Sudan, Zaire, Central Africa
Republic of South Africa
Western Russia (Moscow)
Eastern Africa, Kenya, Ethiopia
Moscow, Saudi Arabia, Syria
Pakistan
AST10adt
YST9ydt
PST8PDT
MST7
Aleutian Standard/Daylight
Yukon Standard/Daylight
Pacific Standard/Daylight
Mountain Standard only
Mountain Standard/Daylight
Central Standard/Daylight
Eastern Standard only
Eastern Standard/Daylight
Atlantic Standard/Daylight
Newfoundland Standard/Daylight
Peru, Ecuador, Columbia
Venezuela, Guyana, Surinam
Western Brazil, Bolivia, Chile
Argentina, Eastern Brazil
Iceland
MET1metdst
EET2
CAT2
MST7MDT
CST6CDT
EST5
SAST2sadt
WST3
EAT3
EST5EDT
AST4ADT
NST330NDT
SAT5
WAT3
PST5
IST530
TST7
India
Thailand
SAT430
SAT4
SST7
Singapore
Phillipines, Hong Kong, China, Taiwan
Western Australia
EAT8
SAT3
WST8
IST1
JST9
Japan, Korea
WAT0
CST930cdt
EST10edt
NZST12nzdt
NW Africa, Morocco, Mauritania
Western Europe/Daylight
Portuguese Winter/Summer
Central Australia Standard/Daylight
Eastern Australia Standard/Daylight
New Zealand Standard/Daylight
WET0WETDST
PWT0pst
SYSTem:VERSion?
Returns the version of SCPI with which it is compatible.
4-94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
TRACe Subsystem Commands
TRACe Subsystem Commands
TRACe[:DATA]:X:STARt? TRA|TRB|TRC|TRD|TRE|TRF
Returns the start value for the X-axis data for the trace. The X-axis data will
be evenly spaced points from STARt to STOP. The number of points is deter-
mined by the TRACe:POINts setting.
TRACe[:DATA]:X:TIME:SSTop TRA|TRB|TRC|TRD|TRE|TRF <numeric_value>[S|MS|US]
This command sets the start and stop values for the X-axis data for the trace
and sets the X-axis type to TIME. The first <numeric_value> corresponds to
the start, and the second corresponds to the stop. If the stop value is greater
than the start value, a “Data out of range” error will be generated. The X-axis
data will be evenly spaced points from start to stop. The number of points is
determined by the TRACe:POINts setting. If the trace has an expression
defined, this expression will be cleared when changing the X-axis start/stop.
Changing the X-axis data in a trace used in an expression
(CALCulate:MATH:EXPRession) by another trace may cause an error in the
expression if the X-axis data in the operands of the expression no longer
match.
TRACe[:DATA]:X:TYPE? TRA|TRB|TRC|TRD|TRE|TRF
This query reads the X-axis type for the trace. The X-axis will be WAV for a
trace acquired in a normal span, or TIME for a trace acquired in zero span.
The trace names defined for the instrument are: TRA, TRB, TRC, TRD, TRE,
and TRF. Specifying any other will generate an “Illegal parameter value” error.
4-95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
TRACe Subsystem Commands
TRACe[:DATA]:X:[WAVelength]SSTop TRA|TRB|TRC|TRD|TRE|TRF,
<numeric_value>[M|UM|NM|A|HZ|KHZ|MHZ|GHZ],<numeric_value>[M|UM|NM|A|HZ|KHZ|MHZ|GHZ]
Sets the start and stop values for the X-axis data for the trace. The first
<numeric_value> corresponds to the start, and the second corresponds to the
stop. If the stop value is a shorter wavelength than the start value, a “Data out
of range” error will be generated. The X-axis data will be evenly spaced points
from start to stop. The number of points is determined by the TRACe:POINts
setting. If the trace has an expression defined, this expression will be cleared
when the X-axis start/stop is changed.
Changing the X-axis data in a trace used in an expression
(CALCulate:MATH:EXPRession) by another trace may cause an error in the
expression if the X-axis data in the operands of the expression no longer
match.
TRACe[:DATA]:X:STOP? TRA|TRB|TRC|TRD|TRE|TRF
Returns the stop value for the X-axis data for the trace. The X-axis data will be
evenly spaced points from STARt to STOP. The number of points is deter-
mined by the TRACe:POINts setting.
TRACe[:DATA][:Y]? TRA|TRB|TRC|TRD|TRE|TRF
Returns the Y-axis data points for the trace. The units are determined by the
definition of the trace. The trace data format used in the command is deter-
mined by the FORMat subsystem.
4-96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
TRACe Subsystem Commands
TRACe[:DATA][:Y][:POWer] TRA|TRB|TRC|TRD|TRE|TRF,<data_block>
|<numeric_value>{,<numeric_value>}
Sets the Y-axis data points for the trace. The number of Y-axis data points is
determined by the TRACe:POINts setting. If a single numeric value is given, all
of the Y-axis data points will be set to that value. If more than one value is
sent, the trace length will be set to the number of values sent.
This command should be used where trace data represents power. The trace
data format to be used with this command is determined by the FORMat sub-
system.
TRACe[:DATA][:Y]:RATio TRA|TRB|TRC|TRD|TRE|TRF,<data_block>
|<numeric_value>{,<numeric_value>}
Sets the Y-axis data points for the trace. The number of Y-axis data points is
determined by the TRACe:POINts setting. If a single numeric value is given, all
the Y-axis data points will be set to that value. If more than one value is sent,
the trace length will be set to the number of values sent.
This command should be used when the trace data represents a power ratio
(unitless number). The trace data format to be used with this command is
determined by the FORMat subsystem.
TRACe:EXCHange TRA,TRB|TRC|TRD|TRE|TRF
TRACe:EXCHange TRB, TRC
Exchanges both the X-axis and Y-axis data of the two traces. The only trace
pairs that can be exchanged are TRA with any trace, and TRB with TRC. Spec-
ifying any other trace will generate an “Illegal parameter value” error.
The TRACe:FEED:CONTrol of the two traces is set to NEVer before the data is
exchanged. Both X-axis and Y-axis data will be exchanged. After the data is
exchanged, the TRACe:FEED:CONTrol of the two traces is left at NEVer.
Changing the X-axis data in a trace used in an expression
(CALCulate:MATH:EXPRession) may cause an error in the expression if the
X-axis data in the operands of the expression no longer match.
4-97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
TRACe Subsystem Commands
TRACe:FEED:CONTrol TRA|TRB|TRC|TRD|TRE|TRF,ALWays|NEVer
TRACe:FEED:CONTrol? TRA|TRB|TRC|TRD|TRE|TRF
Controls how often the specified trace accepts new data. Setting the
TRACe:FEED:CONTrol command to ALWays will allow the trace to always
accept new data whenever data is available from the FEED. This is equivalent
to turning on the trace update from the front panel.
Setting the TRACe:FEED:CONTrol command to NEVer will cause no new data
to be fed into the trace. This is equivalent to turning off the trace update from
the front panel.
When switching from NEVer to ALWays, all the valid data from the data source
is immediately copied into the trace. If, for example:
• the instrument is in single sweep mode.
• TRA has SENSe:DATA as the FEED and NEVer as the FEED:CONTrol.
• SENSe:DATA contains valid measurement data
Setting the TRACe:FEED:CONTrol command from NEVer to ALWays for TRA
will immediately copy the SENSe:DATA into trace A. If the instrument was in
continuous sweep mode, and a sweep was in progress, setting the CONTrol
command from NEVer to ALWays would immediately copy all the valid
SENSe:DATA for the partial sweep.
TRACe:POINts TRA|TRB|TRC|TRD|TRE|TRF,<numeric_value>
TRACe:POINts? TRA|TRB|TRC|TRD|TRE|TRF
Sets the number of data points to be used in the trace. Use only for download-
ing data with trace subsystem commands. Use SENSe:SWEep:POINts for
changing the measurement trace length. Refer to “[SENSe:]SWEep:POINts
<numeric_value>” on page 4-84.
4-98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
TRIGger Subsystem Commands
TRIGger Subsystem Commands
TRIGger[:SEQuence]:DELay <numeric_value>[S|MS|US|NS]
TRIGger[:SEQuence]:DELay?
Specifies the trigger delay used to start a measurement.
TRIGger[:SEQuence]:OUTPut OFF|ON|AUTO
TRIGger[:SEQuence]:OUTPut?
ADC
OFF
TTL LOW
Controls the
trigger output. When
the signal will be a
. When
ON
TTL HIGH
HIGH
the signal will be a
. When AUTO is specified the signal will go
before
LOW after
the sampling
the sampling interval of the detector and go
interval of the detector.
TRIGger[:SEQuence]:OUTPut:PULSe:DCYCle <numeric_value>
TRIGger[:SEQuence]:OUTPut:PULSe:DCYCle?
Sets the duty cycle of the sync output. This is equivalent to the
SOURce[n]:PULSe:DCYCle command.
TRIGger[:SEQuence]:OUTPut:PULSe:WIDTh <numeric_value>[S|MS|US|NS]
TRIGger[:SEQuence]:OUTPut:PULSe:WIDTh?
Sets the pulse width of the sync output. This is equivalent to the
SOURce[n]:PULSe:WIDTh command.
TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SLOPe POSitive|NEGative|EITHer
TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SLOPe?
Specifies the polarity of triggering used to start a measurement. Specifying the
slope sets the trigger source to INTernal.
4-99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
TRIGger Subsystem Commands
TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURce IMMediate|EXTernal|INTernal
TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURce?
Specifies the source, or type, of triggering used to start a measurement. Set-
ting the source to anything other than INTernal sets the slope to EITHer.
4-100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
UNIT Subsystem Commands
UNIT Subsystem Commands
UNIT:POWer DBM|W|AUTO
UNIT:POWer?
Specifies the amplitude units for the input, output, and display of the active
window and sets the UNIT:RATio units to the corresponding setting.
UNIT:RATio DB|LINear|AUTO
UNIT:RATio?
Specifies units for the input and output of values that represent power ratios.
These commands are:
CALCulate:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:FUNCtion:BWIDth|BANDwidth:NDB
DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:SCALe:AUTO:PDIVision
DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:SCALe:PDIVision
TRACe:DATA:Y?
This command also sets UNIT:POWer to the corresponding setting.
4-101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
HP 71450 Series Commands to HP 86140 Series Equivalents
HP 71450 Series Commands to HP 86140 Series
Equivalents
The following table provides a list of the HP 71450 series commands and the
SCPI equivalent commands for the HP 86140 series analyzers.
Table 4-8. HP 71450 Series Commands to HP 86140 Series Commands (1 of 12)
HP 71450 Series
Equivalent HP 86140 Series Command
Command
ABORT
ABS
CALCulate1:MATH:EXPRession[:DEFine] <expression>
CALCulate1:MATH:STATe ON
ACTDEF
ACTPARM
ADAPBTL
CALCulate1:MATH:EXPRession[:DEFine] <expression>
CALCulate1:MATH:STATe ON
ADAPBPCTL
ADBTL
CALCulate1:MATH:EXPRession[:DEFine] <expression>
CALCulate1:MATH:STATe ON
CALCulate1:MATH:EXPRession[:DEFine] <expression>
CALCulate1:MATH:STATe ON
ADCTL
CALCulate1:MATH:EXPRession[:DEFine] <expression>
CALCulate1:MATH:STATe ON
ADCTRG
TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SLOPe POSitive|NEGative|EITHer
TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURce IMMediate|EXTernal|INTernal
ADCTRGDLY
ADCTRGSYN
ADD
TRIGger[:SEQuence]:DELay <numeric_value>[<unit>]
TRIGger[:SEQuence]:OUTPut OFF|ON|0|1|AUTO
CALCulate1:MATH:EXPRession[:DEFine] <expression>
CALCulate1:MATH:STATe ON
ALIGN
ALIGNPRST
AMB
CALibration:ALIGn:EXTernal
CALibration:ALIGn:PRESet
CALCulate1:MATH:EXPRession[:DEFine] <expression>
CALCulate1:MATH:STATe ON
AMBMC
CALCulate1:MATH:EXPRession[:DEFine] <expression>
CALCulate1:MATH:STATe ON
4-102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
HP 71450 Series Commands to HP 86140 Series Equivalents
Table 4-8. HP 71450 Series Commands to HP 86140 Series Commands (2 of 12)
HP 71450 Series
Equivalent HP 86140 Series Command
Command
AMBMCPL
AMBPL
AMC
CALCulate1:MATH:EXPRession[:DEFine] <expression>
CALCulate1:MATH:STATe ON
CALCulate1:MATH:EXPRession[:DEFine] <expression>
CALCulate1:MATH:STATe ON
CALCulate1:MATH:EXPRession[:DEFine] <expression>
CALCulate1:MATH:STATe ON
AMCPL
CALCulate1:MATH:EXPRession[:DEFine] <expression>
CALCulate1:MATH:STATe ON
AMETER
AMPCOR
AMPMKR
AMPU
[SENSe:]CORRection:OFFSet[:MAGNitude] <numeric_value>
CALCulate:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:FUNCtion:BWIDth|BANDwidth:NDB <param>
ANNOFF
ANNOT
APB
DISPlay[:WINDow[1]]:ANNotation[:ALL] OFF|ON|0|1
CALCulate1:MATH:EXPRession[:DEFine] <expression>
CALCulate1:MATH:STATe ON
APBDCTL
CALCulate1:MATH:EXPRession[:DEFine] <expression>
CALCulate1:MATH:STATe ON
AUNITS
UNIT:POWer DBM|W|AUTO
AUTOALIGN
CALibration:ALIGn[:AUTO]
CALibration:ALIGn:AUTO:MARKer[1|2|3|4]
AUTOMDB
DISPlay[:WINDow[1]]:TRACe:Y:SCALe:AUTO:PDIVision <param>
DISPlay[:WINDow[1]]:TRACe:Y:SCALe:AUTO:PDIVision:AUTO:PDIVision
:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1
AUTOMEAS
AUTOMMKR
AUTOMOPT
AUTOMSP
DISPlay[:WINDow[1]]:TRACe:ALL[:SCALe][:AUTO]
DISPlay[:WINDow[1]]:TRACe:ALL[:SCALe][:AUTO]:MARKer OFF|ON|0|1
DISPlay[:WINDow[1]]:TRACe:ALL[:SCALe][:AUTO]:OPTimize OFF|ON|0|1
DISPlay[:WINDow[1]]:TRACe:X:SCALe:AUTO:SPAN <param>
DISPlay[:WINDow[1]]:TRACe:X:SCALe:AUTO:SPAN:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1
AUTORNG
AVG
[SENSe:]POWer:AC:RANGe:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1
CALCulate1:MATH:EXPRession[:DEFine] <expression>
CALCulate1:MATH:STATe ON
AXB
AXC
BIT
TRACe:EXCHange TRA, TRB
TRACe:EXCHange TRA, TRC
BLANK
DISPlay[:WINDow[1]]:TRACe[:STATe] <trace>,OFF|ON|0|1
4-103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
HP 71450 Series Commands to HP 86140 Series Equivalents
Table 4-8. HP 71450 Series Commands to HP 86140 Series Commands (3 of 12)
HP 71450 Series
Equivalent HP 86140 Series Command
Command
BML
CALCulate1:MATH:EXPRession[:DEFine] <expression>
CALCulate1:MATH:STATe ON
BP
BTC
BXC
CAL
TRACe:EXCHange TRB, TRC
CALibration:PRESet
CALibration:POWer
CALibration:WAVelength
CALibration:WAVelength:MARKer
CALCOR
CALibration:STATe
CALibration:POWer:STATe
CALibration:WAVelength:STATe
CALDATA
CALPWR
CALWL
CATALOG
CENTERWL
CHEIGHT
CHOP
CALibration:POWer:VALue
CALibration:WAVelength:VALue
MMEMory:CATalog?
[SENSe:]WAVelength:CENTer <param>
[SENSe:]CHOP[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1
CLRDSP
CLRW
CLS
TRACe:FEED:CONTrol <trace>, ALWays
*CLS
COMPRESS
CONCAT
CONFIG
CONTS
CORSEL
CORTOLIM
CWIDTH
DE
INITiate:CONTinuous ON|1
DEBUG
DELETE
DFB_
DISPOSE
DISPU
4-104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
HP 71450 Series Commands to HP 86140 Series Equivalents
Table 4-8. HP 71450 Series Commands to HP 86140 Series Commands (4 of 12)
HP 71450 Series
Equivalent HP 86140 Series Command
Command
DIV
CALCulate1:MATH:EXPRession[:DEFine] <expression>
CALCulate1:MATH:STATe ON
DL
CALCulate1:MATH:EXPRession[:DEFine] <expression>
CALCulate1:MATH:STATe ON
DONE
*OPC?
DSPLY
DSPMODE
DSPTEXT
CALCulate1:MATH:EXPRession[:DEFine] <expression>
CALCulate1:MATH:STATe ON
DWINDOW
ENTER
ERASE
ERR
SYSTem:ERRor?
EXP
CALCulate1:MATH:EXPRession[:DEFine] <expression>
CALCulate1:MATH:STATe ON
FETCH
FFT
FFTKNL
FORMAT
FP_
MMEMory:INITialize [FLOPpy]
FP_MKBW
FP_TH
FS
[SENSe:][WAVelength:]SPAN:FULL
FUNCDEF
GATESWP
GRAPH
GRAT
GRATORDER
GRATSCRL
GRID
DISPlay[:WINDow[1]]:TRACe:GRATicule:GRID[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1
[SENSe:]GORDer[:AUTO] OFF|ON|0|1
HD
ID
*IDN?
IF/THEN
IGEN
IGENDTYCY
IGENLIMIT
SOURce[n]:PULSe:DCYCle <numeric_value>
4-105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
HP 71450 Series Commands to HP 86140 Series Equivalents
Table 4-8. HP 71450 Series Commands to HP 86140 Series Commands (5 of 12)
HP 71450 Series
Equivalent HP 86140 Series Command
Command
IGENPW
INSTMODE
INT
SOURce[n]:PULSe:WIDTh <numeric_value>
CALCulate1:MATH:EXPRession[:DEFine] <expression>
CALCulate1:MATH:STATe ON
IP
SYSTem:PRESet
IT
IWINDOW
KEYCLR
KEYDEF
KEYPST
LED_
LG
DISPlay[:WINDow[1]]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:SPACing LOGarithmic
DISPlay[:WINDow[1]]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:PDIVision <numeric_value>[<unit>]
LIGHT
LIMIAMP
LIMIBEEP
LIMIBOT
LIMIDEL
LIMIDONE
LIMIEDIT
LIMIFAIL
LIMIHALF
LIMILINE
LIMINEXT
LIMIRCL
LIMIREL
LIMISAV
LIMISCRL
LIMISDEL
LIMISEG
LIMITEST
LIMITYPE
LIMIWL
LIMTOCOR
LINES
LINET
4-106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
HP 71450 Series Commands to HP 86140 Series Equivalents
Table 4-8. HP 71450 Series Commands to HP 86140 Series Commands (6 of 12)
HP 71450 Series
Equivalent HP 86140 Series Command
Command
LN
DISPlay[:WINDow[1]]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:SPACing LINear
LOAD
LOG
MDS
MEAN
FORMat[:DATA] <param>
CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:MEAN:STATe ON
CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:MEAN[:DATA]?
MEASU
MEASURE
MEM
MIN
CALCulate1:MATH:EXPRession[:DEFine] <expression>
CALCulate1:MATH:STATe ON
MINH
MK
CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:MINimum[:STATe] ON
MKA
CALCulate:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:Y?
MKACT
MKAL
MKAR
MKBW
CALCulate:MARKer[1|2|3|4][:STATe] ON|1
CALCulate:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:FUNCtion:BWIDth|BANDwidth:X:LEFT?
CALCulate:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:FUNCtion:BWIDth|BANDwidth:X:RIGHt?
CALCulate:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:FUNCtion:BWIDth|BANDwidth:RESult?
CALCulate:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:FUNCtion:BWIDth|BANDwidth[:STATe]
MKBWA
CALCulate:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:FUNCtion:BWIDth|BANDwidth:NDB
CALCulate:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:FUNCtion:BWIDth|BANDwidth:RESult?
MKCONT
MKCWL
MKD
CALCulate:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:SCENter
CALCulate:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:FUNCtion:BWIDth|BANDwidth:NDB
CALCulate:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:FUNCtion:BWIDth|BANDwidth:RESult?
MKDACT?
MKDREFA
MKDREFF
MKMIN
MKN
CALCulate:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:MINimum
CALCulate:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:FUNCtion:PRESet
CALCulate:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:X <param>
MKNOISE
MKOFF
CALCulate:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:FUNCtion:NOISe[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1
CALCulate:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:FUNCtion:NOISe:RESult?
CALCulate:MARKer:AOFF
CALCulate:MARKer[1|2|3|4][:STATe] OFF|0
MKP
MKPABS
4-107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
HP 71450 Series Commands to HP 86140 Series Equivalents
Table 4-8. HP 71450 Series Commands to HP 86140 Series Commands (7 of 12)
HP 71450 Series
Equivalent HP 86140 Series Command
Command
MKPAUSE
MKPITX
MKPK
CALCulate:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:PEXCursion:PIT <param>
CALCulate:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:MAXimum
CALCulate:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:MAXimum:NEXT
CALCulate:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:MAXimum:LEFT
CALCulate:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:MAXimum:RIGHt
CALCulate:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:MINimum:NEXT
CALCulate:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:MINimum:LEFT
CALCulate:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:MINimum:RIGHt
MKPX
CALCulate:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:PEXCursion[:PEAK] <param>
MKREAD
CALCulate:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:FUNCtion:BWIDth|BANDwidth:READout
FREQuency|WAVelength|TIME
CALCulate:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:FUNCtion:DELTa:X:READout
FREQuency|WAVelength|TIME
MKRL
CALCulate:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:SRLevel
MKSP
MKSS
MKSTOP
MKT
MKTRACE
MKTRACK
MKTUNE
MKTV
CALCulate:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:TRACe <source_trace>
MKTYPE
CALCulate:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:FUNCtion:NOISe[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1
CALCulate:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:FUNCtion:DELTa[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1
CALCulate:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:FUNCtion:BWIDth|BANDwidth[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1
CALCulate:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:FUNCtion:PRESet
MKWL
MOD
CALCulate:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:X <param>
CALCulate1:MATH:EXPRession[:DEFine] <expression>
CALCulate1:MATH:STATe ON
MODADD
MODID
MOV
CALCulate1:MATH:EXPRession[:DEFine] <expression>
CALCulate1:MATH:STATe ON
MPY
CALCulate1:MATH:EXPRession[:DEFine] <expression>
CALCulate1:MATH:STATe ON
MSG
MSI
4-108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
HP 71450 Series Commands to HP 86140 Series Equivalents
Table 4-8. HP 71450 Series Commands to HP 86140 Series Commands (8 of 12)
HP 71450 Series
Equivalent HP 86140 Series Command
Command
MXM
CALCulate1:MATH:EXPRession[:DEFine] <expression>
CALCulate1:MATH:STATe ON
MXMH
NORM
CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:MAXimum[:STATe] ON
NSTATE
ONEOS
ONMENU
ONMKR
ONUSER
ONWINDOW
OP
OPTSW
OR
OUTPUT
OVRW
PA
PAUSE
PD
PDA
PDL_
PDLCALC
PDLDEV
PDL_DEV?
PDLEXIT
PDLINIT
PDLREV
PDL_REV?
PDLSCALE
PDLSRC
PDL_SRC?
PDMEAS
PDWL
PEAKS
CALCulate:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:MAXimum
CALCulate:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:X?
CALCulate:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:MAXimum:NEXT
CALCulate:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:X?
4-109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
HP 71450 Series Commands to HP 86140 Series Equivalents
Table 4-8. HP 71450 Series Commands to HP 86140 Series Commands (9 of 12)
HP 71450 Series
Equivalent HP 86140 Series Command
Command
PEN
PERASE
PERSIST
PLOT
HCOPy[:IMMediate]
POSU
POWERON
PR
SYSTem:PON[:TYPE] PRESet|LAST
PREFX
PROTECT
PSTATE
PU
PURGE
PWRBW
RB
MMEMory:DELete <file_name>[,INTernal|FLOPpy]
[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution] <param>
[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1
RBR
[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:RATio <param>
RCLD
RCLS
RCLT
*RCL <numeric_value>|<filename>[,INTernal|FLOPpy]
MMEMory:LOAD:TRACe <trace>, <file_name>
RCLU
READMENU
RELHPIB
REPEAT/ UNTIL
RETURN
REV
*IDN?
RL
DISPlay[:WINDow[1]]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel
<numeric_value>[<unit>]
RLPOS
RMS
DISPlay[:WINDow[1]]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RPOSition <numeric_value>
ROFFSET
RQS
[SENSe:]CORRection:OFFSet[:MAGNitude] <numeric_value>
*SRE
SAVED
SAVES
SAVET
SAVEU
SCALE
*SAV <numeric_value>|<filename>[,INTernal|FLOPpy]
MMEMory:STORe:TRACe <trace>, <file_name>
4-110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
HP 71450 Series Commands to HP 86140 Series Equivalents
Table 4-8. HP 71450 Series Commands to HP 86140 Series Commands (10 of 12)
HP 71450 Series
Equivalent HP 86140 Series Command
Command
SENS
[SENSe:]POWer:AC:RANGe:LOWer <numeric_value>|<step>
[SENSe:]POWer:AC:RANGe:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1
SER
*IDN?
SMOOTH
SNGLS
SP
SPANWL
SQR
INITiate:CONTinuous OFF|0
[SENSe:]WAVelength:SPAN <param>
[SENSe:]WAVelength:SPAN <param>
CALCulate1:MATH:EXPRession[:DEFine] <expression>
CALCulate1:MATH:STATe ON
SRINPUT
SRQ
SS
[SENSe:]WAVelength:CENTer:STEP[:INCRement] <param>
[SENSe:]WAVelength:CENTer:STEP:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1
ST
[SENSe:]SWEep:TIME <param>
[SENSe:]SWEep:TIME:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1
STARTUP
STARTWL
STATE
STB
[SENSe:]WAVelength:STARt <param>
*STB?
STDEV
STOPWL
STOR
[SENSe:]WAVelength:STOP <param>
STORREF
SUB
CALCulate1:MATH:EXPRession[:DEFine] <expression>
CALCulate1:MATH:STATe ON
SUM
CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:TPOWer:STATe ON
CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:TPOWer[:DATA]?
SUMSQR
SWEEP
SWPMODE?
TDF
INITiate:CONTinuous OFF|ON|0|1
INITiate:CONTinuous?
FORMat[:DATA] <param>
TEST
*TST?
TEXT
TH
DISPlay[:WINDow[1]]:TEXT:DATA <string>|<block>
CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:THReshold <param>
THREED
THREEDH
4-111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
HP 71450 Series Commands to HP 86140 Series Equivalents
Table 4-8. HP 71450 Series Commands to HP 86140 Series Commands (11 of 12)
HP 71450 Series
Equivalent HP 86140 Series Command
Command
THREEDV
TIME
TITLE
DISPlay[:WINDow[1]]:TEXT:DATA <string>|<block>
TM
TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURce IMMediate|EXTernal|INTernal
TP
TRA/TRB/TRC
TRACe:DATA[:Y]? <trace_name>
TRACe[:DATA][:Y][:POWer] <trace_name>,<data_block>|
<numeric_value>{,<numeric_value>}
TRACe:DATA[:Y]:RATio <trace_name>,<block>|
<numeric_value>{,<numeric_value>}
TRCOND
TRDEF
TRDSP
TRNSZLOCK
TRPST
SENSe:SWEep:POINts <numeric value>
DISPlay[:WINDow[1]]:TRACe[:STATe] <trace>,OFF|ON|0|1
[SENSe:]POWer:RANGe:LOCK
DISPlay[:WINDow[1]]:TRACe[:STATe] TRA,ON
DISPlay[:WINDow[1]]:TRACe[:STATe] TRB,OFF
DISPlay[:WINDow[1]]:TRACe[:STATe] TRC,OFF
CALCulate1:MATH:STATe OFF
CALCulate1:AVERage[:STATe] OFF
CALCulate2:AVERage[:STATe] OFF
CALCulate3:AVERage[:STATe] OFF
TRACe:POINts TRA,800
TRACe:POINts TRB,800
TRACe:POINts TRC,800
TRSTAT
TS
DISPlay[:WINDow[1]]:TRACe[:STATe]? <trace>
INITiate[:IMMediate]
TWNDOW
USERERR
USERKEY
USERLOCK
USERMSG
USERWARN
USTATE
VARDEF
VARIANCE
VAVG
CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:AVERage:COUNt <numeric_value>
CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:AVERage[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1
4-112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
HP 71450 Series Commands to HP 86140 Series Equivalents
Table 4-8. HP 71450 Series Commands to HP 86140 Series Commands (12 of 12)
HP 71450 Series
Equivalent HP 86140 Series Command
Command
VB
[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo <param>
[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1
VIEW
DISPlay[:WINDow[1]]:TRACe[:STATe] <trace>,OFF|ON|0|1
VTDL
VTH
VTL
VW
WAIT
WARN?
WARNCTRL
WLLIMIT
WLMKRL
WLMKRR
WLOFFSET
WLUNITS
XAMPSW
XCH
[SENSe:][WAVelength:]LIMit OFF|ON|0|1
CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:TPOWer:IRANge:LOWer <param>
CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:TPOWer:IRANge:UPPer <param>
[SENSe:][WAVelength:]OFFSet <numeric_value>
XERR
SYSTem:ERRor?
XWARN
ZERO
CALibration:ZERO[:AUTO] OFF|ON|0|1|ONCE
ZOOMRB
CALCulate:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:SCENter
[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution] <param>
[SENSe:][WAVelength:]SPAN 0
4-113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Operation
HP 71450 Series Commands to HP 86140 Series Equivalents
4-114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5
Overview 5-2
OSA Notices 5-16
OSA Warnings 5-17
Application-Specific Warnings 5-28
OSA Status Errors 5-34
OSA Errors 5-35
Firmware Errors 5-37
Status Listings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Status Listings
Overview
Overview
This document describes the status listings of the HP 86140 series optical
spectrum analyzers. Status conditions for the optical spectrum analyzer are
grouped into categories.
Error
Indicates the instrument is malfunctioning. Measurement accuracy is probably
affected. Errors can be caused by either a hardware or a firmware problem.
The instrument requires repair at a Hewlett-Packard service center.
Status error
Indicates an internal hardware function is unavailable or not operating within
specifications. This is usually a temporary problem, such as a temperature
control loop being unsettled. Status errors cannot be cleared by the user.
When the condition causing the error is corrected the error will go away.
Warning
A warning is displayed when the optical spectrum analyzer cannot satisfy a
request from the user. Parameter entries that are out of range, illegal or unrec-
ognized remote commands or missing hardware options can cause a warning
to be displayed. A warning can be displayed if a requested measurement, for
example AutoMeasure, cannot be performed due to a missing input signal.
UNCAL
Notice
This message alerts the user the requested instrument setup can cause an
invalid measurement. For example, manually setting the sweep time to a value
that is too fast for other instrument settings.
A user alert indicating something in the state of the instrument has changed.
For example, if the user specifies a particular value for the current duty cycle,
a notice will be displayed when the optical spectrum analyzer modifies the
pulse width .
5-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Status Listings
Overview
The following table lists the error numbers and their definitions.
Number Range
Definition
–1 to –999
Standard SCPI errors
OSA notices
1000 to 2999
3000 to 4999
5000 to 7999
8000 to 9999
10000 to 11999
12000 to 13999
20000 to 21999
22000 to 23999
30000 to 32767
Application specific notices
OSA warnings
Application specific warnings
OSA status errors
Application specific status errors
OSA errors
Application specific errors
Firmware errors
5-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Status Listings
Error Reporting Behavior
Error Reporting Behavior
Errors are displayed in an on-screen dialog box. To continue operation, the
user must acknowledge the error by pressing a button.
Status errors are displayed with a descriptive line in the lower-left corner of
System
the graticule. Immediately press the
key below the display, and then
softkey to the right of the display to display more information. A
Show Critical Errors Show HW Errors Show
Help
press the
softkey menu is displayed that includes,
Warnings Show Notices
,
,
, and
. If there are any errors, warnings or notices, one or
more of these keys are enabled. Press the key to display a more complete
description of the condition causing the message.
Warnings and notices are displayed in a status line at the bottom of the screen.
System
They are cleared when any front-panel key, other than the
pressed, or they will clear automatically after a few seconds. To view warnings
System
Help
key, is
and notices, press the front-panel
key, the
UNCAL
softkey.
softkey and then the
is displayed as red text in the
Show Warnings Show Notices
or
lower-right corner of the graticule. It is only displayed when a condition exists
that can lead to an inaccurate measurement. There are cases when valid mea-
UNCAL
surements can be made while an
should use caution.
condition exists, but the operator
5-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Status Listings
SCPI-Defined Errors
SCPI-Defined Errors
SCPI 1997 Vol-
These error messages and descriptions were copied from the
ume 2: Command reference
. The sentences enclosed in brackets “[ ]” are
copied from the error descriptions in the SCPI reference. References are also
made to IEEE 488.2 sections for further clarification of events.
Not all the available SCPI error messages were utilized in the optical spectrum
analyzer. Only those pertinent to the instrument were implemented.
Note that some of the error messages do not contain descriptions or help mes-
sages. These error numbers are reserved for future expansion. This document
is subject to further change and development.
Standards related information
Further information on the Standard Commands for Programmable Instru-
ments (SCPI) standard is available from the SCPI consortium.
Contact:
Fred Bode, Executive Director
SCPI Consortium
8380 Hercules Drive, Suite P3
La Mesa, CA 91942
Phone: (619) 697-8790
FAX:
(619) 697-5955
CompuServe Number: 76516,254
For more detailed information on the IEEE 488.2 Standard, order a reference
copy.
5-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Status Listings
SCPI-Defined Errors
Contact:
The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc.
345 East 47th Street
New York, New York 10017-2394
Phone: (800) 678-IEEE (US) 8 a.m. – 4:30 p.m. (EST)
(908) 981-1393 (International)
Fax:
(908) 981-9667
Standard SCPI errors (–1 to –999)
All positive numbers are instrument-dependent. All negative numbers are
reserved by the SCPI standard with certain standard error/event codes
described in this document. The value, zero, is also reserved to indicate that
no error or event has occurred.
Error/event numbers
The system-defined error/event numbers are chosen on an enumerated (“1 of
N”) basis. The SCPI-defined error/event numbers and the <error/event
description> portions of the full queue item are listed here. The first error/
event described in each class (for example, –100, –200, –300, –400) is a
“generic” error. In selecting the proper Error/event number to report, more
specific error/event codes are preferred, and the generic error/event is used
only if the others are inappropriate.
Command errors
An <error/event number> in the range [–199 , –100] indicates that an
IEEE 488.2 syntax error has been detected by the instrument’s parser. The
occurrence of any error in this class shall cause the command error bit (bit 5)
in the event status register (IEEE 488.2, section 11.5.1) to be set.
One of the following events has occurred:
• An IEEE 488.2 syntax error has been detected by the parser. That is, a control-
ler-to-device message was received which is in violation of the IEEE 488.2 stan-
dard. Possible violations include a data element which violates the device
5-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Status Listings
SCPI-Defined Errors
listening formats or whose type is unacceptable to the device.
• An unrecognized header was received. Unrecognizedheaders include incorrect
device-specific headers and incorrect or unimplemented IEEE 488.2 common
commands.
• A Group Execute Trigger (GET) was entered into the input buffer inside of an
IEEE 488.2 <PROGRAM MESSAGE>.
Events that generate command errors shall not generate execution errors,
device-specific errors, or query errors; see the other error definitions in this
chapter.
Table 5-1. Command Errors (1 of 4)
Error Number
Error Description [description/explanation/examples]
–101
desc = “Invalid character”
help = ““
[A syntactic element contains a character which is invalid for that type; for
example, a header containing an ampersand, SETUP&. This error might be used
in place of errors –114, –121, –141, and perhaps some others.]
–102
–103
desc = “Syntax error”
help = ““
[An unrecognized command or data type was encountered for example, a sting
was received when the instrument does not accept strings.]
desc = “Invalid separator”
help = ““
[The parser was expecting a separator and encountered an illegal character; for
example, the semicolon was omitted after a program message unit, *EMC
1:CH1:VOLTS 5.]
–104
–105
desc = “Wrong Parameter Type”
help = ““
[The parser recognized a data element different than one allowed; for example,
numeric or string data was expected but block data was encountered.]
desc = “GET not allowed”
help = ““
[A Group Execute Trigger was received within a program message (see
IEEE 488.2, 7.7).]
5-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Status Listings
SCPI-Defined Errors
Table 5-1. Command Errors (2 of 4)
Error Number
Error Description [description/explanation/examples]
–108
desc = “Parameter not allowed”
help = ““
[More parameters were received than expected for the header; for example,
the *EMC common command only accepts one parameter, so receiving *EMC
0,1 is not allowed.]
–109
desc = “Missing parameter”
help = ““
[Fewer parameters were received than required for the header; for example,
the *EMC common command requires one parameter, so receiving *EMC is not
allowed.]
–112
–113
desc = “Program mnemonic too long”
help = ““
[The header contains more that twelve characters (see IEEE 488.2, 7.6.1.4.1).]
desc = “Undefined header”
help = ““
[The header is syntactically correct, but it is undefined for this specific device;
for example, *XYZ is not defined for any device.]
–120
desc = “Numeric Data Error”
help = “
[This error, as well as errors –121 through –129, are generated when parsing a
data element which appears to be numeric, including the non-decimal numeric
types. This particular error message should be used if the device cannot detect
a more specific error.]
–121
–123
–124
desc = “Invalid character in number”
help = ““
[An invalid character for the data type being parsed was encountered; for
example, an alpha in a decimal numeric or a “9” in octal data.]
desc = “Exponent too large”
help = ““
[The magnitude of the exponent was larger than 32000 (see IEEE 488.2,
7.7.2.4.1).]
desc = “Too many digits”
help = ““
[The mantissa of a decimal numeric data element contained more than
255 digits excluding leading zeros (see IEEE 488.2, 7.7.2.4.1).]
5-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Status Listings
SCPI-Defined Errors
Table 5-1. Command Errors (3 of 4)
Error Number
Error Description [description/explanation/examples]
–128
desc = “Numeric data not allowed”
help = ““
[A legal numeric data element was received, but the device does not accept
one in this position for the header.]
–131
desc = “Invalid suffix”
help = ““
The suffix does not follow the syntax described in IEEE 488.2, 7.7.3.2, or the
suffix is inappropriate for this device.]
–134
–138
desc = “Suffix too long”
help = ““
[The suffix contained more than 12 characters (see IEEE 488.2, 7.7.3.4).]
desc = “Suffix not allowed”
help = ““
[A suffix was encountered after a numeric element which does not allow
suffixes.]
–148
–150
desc = “Character data not allowed”
help = ““
[A legal character data element was encountered where prohibited by the
device.]
desc = “String data error”
help = ““
[This error, as well as errors –151 through –159, are generated when parsing a
string data element. This particular error message should be used if the device
cannot detect a more specific error.]
–151
–158
desc = “Invalid string data”
help = ““
A string data element was expected, but was invalid for some reason (see IEEE
488.2, 7.7.5.2); for example, an END message was received before the terminal
quote character.]
desc = “String data not allowed”
help = ““
[A string data element was encountered but was not allowed by the device at
this point in parsing.]
5-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Status Listings
SCPI-Defined Errors
Table 5-1. Command Errors (4 of 4)
Error Number
Error Description [description/explanation/examples]
–161
desc = “Invalid block data”
help = ““
[A block data element was expected, but was invalid for some reason (see IEEE
488.2, 7.7.6.2); for example, an END message was received before the length
was satisfied.]
–168
–170
desc = “Block data not allowed”
help = ““
[A legal block data element was encountered but was not allowed by the
device at this point in parsing.]
desc = “Expression error”
help = ““
[This error, as well as errors –171 through –179, are generated when parsing
an expression data element. This particular error message should be used if the
device cannot detect a more specific error.]
–171
–178
–181
–183
desc = “Invalid expression”
help = ““
[The expression data element was invalid (see IEEE 488.2, 7.7.7.2); for example,
unmatched parentheses or an illegal character.]
desc = “Expression data not allowed”
help = ““
[A legal expression data was encountered but was not allowed by the device at
this point in parsing.]
desc = “Invalid outside macro definition”
help = ““
[Indicates that a macro parameter placeholder ($<number) was encountered
outside of a macro definition.]
desc = “Invalid inside macro definition”
help = ““
Indicates that the program message unit sequence, sent with a *DDT or *DMC
command, is syntactically invalid (see IEEE 488.2, 10.7.6.3).]
5-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Status Listings
SCPI-Defined Errors
Execution errors
An <error/event number> in the range [–299 , –200] indicates that an error has
been detected by the instrument’s execution control block. The occurrence of
any error in this class shall cause the execution error bit (bit 4) in the event
status register (IEEE 488.2, section 11.5.1) to be set.
One of the following events has occurred:
• A <PROGRAM DATA> element following a header was evaluated by the device
as outside of its legal input range or is otherwise inconsistent with the device’s
capabilities.
• A valid program message could not be properly executed due to some device
condition.
Execution errors shall be reported by the device after rounding and expres-
sion evaluation operations have taken place. Rounding a numeric data ele-
ment, for example, shall not be reported as an execution error. Events that
generate execution errors shall not generate Command Errors, device-specific
errors, or Query Errors; see the other error definitions in this section.
Table 5-2. Execution Errors (1 of 3)
Error Number
Error Description [description/explanation/examples]
–200
desc = “Execution error”
help = ““
[This is the generic syntax error for devices that cannot detect more specific
errors. This code indicates only that an Execution Error as defined in IEEE 488.2,
11.5.1.1.5 has occurred.]
–213
–221
desc = “INIT:IMM command ignored”
help = “An initiate immediate remote command was received. The instrument
was in continuous sweep mode when the command was received. The remote
command is ignored unless the instrument is in single sweep mode. To select
single sweep mode use the INIT:CONT OFF command.”
desc = “Settings Conflict Error”
help = “A request was made but the instrument settings resulting from the
request are in conflict with each other.”
[Indicates that a legal program data element was parsed but could not be
executed due to the current device state (see IEEE 488.2, 6.4.5.3 and 11.5.1.1.5.)]
5-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Status Listings
SCPI-Defined Errors
Table 5-2. Execution Errors (2 of 3)
Error Number
Error Description [description/explanation/examples]
–222
desc = “Data out of range”
help = “A numeric value was entered which is outside the legal range of values
for the parameter. The name of the parameter is listed at the end of the error
message.”
[Indicates that a legal program data element was parsed but could not be
executed because the interpreted value was outside the legal range as defined
by the device (see IEEE 488.2, 11.5.1.1.5.)]
–222
–223
desc = “Span out of range”
help = “A numeric value was entered which is outside the legal range of values
for the span setting. This occurs if the value is too large less than zero or
between zero and 0.2nm. Zero span may not be entered by using the DOWN
arrow key from 0.2nm; a numeric value of zero must be entered instead.”
[Indicates that a legal program data element was parsed but could not be
executed because the interpreted value was outside the legal range as defined
by the device (see IEEE 488.2, 11.5.1.1.5.)]
desc = “Too much data”
help = ““
[Indicates that a legal program data element of block, expression, or string type
was received that contained more data than the device could handle due to
memory or related device-specific requirements.]
–224
–257
desc = “Illegal parameter value”
help = ““
[Used where exact value, from a list of possibles, was expected.]
desc = “File name error”
help = ““
[Indicates that a legal program command or query could not be executed
because the file name on the device media was in error; for example, an attempt
was made to copy to a duplicate file name. The definition of what constitutes a
file name error is device-specific.]
–272
desc = “Macro Exec Error”
help = ““
[Indicates that a syntactically legal macro program data sequence could not be
executed due to some error in the macro definition (see IEEE 488.2, 10.7.6.3.)]
5-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Status Listings
SCPI-Defined Errors
Table 5-2. Execution Errors (3 of 3)
Error Number
Error Description [description/explanation/examples]
–273
desc = “Illegal macro label”
help = ““
[Indicates that the macro label defined in the *DMC command was a legal string
syntax, but could not be accepted by the device (see IEEE 488.2, 10.7.3 and
10.7.6.2); for example, the label was too long, the same as a common command
header, or contained invalid header
–276
–277
desc = “Macro recursion error”
help = ““
[Indicates that a syntactically legal macro program data sequence could not be
executed because the device found it to be recursive (see IEEE 488.2, 10.7.6.6).]
desc = “Macro redefinition not allowed”
help = ““
[Indicates that a syntactically legal macro label in the *DMC command could not
be executed because the macro label was already defined (see IEEE 488.2,
10.7.6.4).]
–278
desc = “Macro header not found”
help = ““
[Indicates that a syntactically legal macro label in the *GMC? query could not be
executed because the header was not previously defined.]
Device-specific errors
An <error/event number> in the range [–399, –300] or [1, 32767] indicates the
instrument has detected an error which is not a command error, a query error,
or an execution error; some device operations did not properly complete, pos-
sibly due to an abnormal hardware or firmware condition. These codes are
also used for self-test response errors. The occurrence of any error in this
class should cause the device-specific error bit (bit 3) in the event status reg-
ister (IEEE 488.2, section 11.5.1) to be set. The meaning of positive error
codes is device-dependent and may be enumerated or bit mapped; the <error
message> string for positive error codes is not defined by SCPI and available
to the device designer. Note that the string is not optional; if the designer does
not wish to implement a string for a particular error, the null string should be
sent (for example, 42,””). The occurrence of any error in this class should
cause the device-specific error bit (bit 3) in the event status register (IEEE
5-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Status Listings
SCPI-Defined Errors
488.2, section 11.5.1) to be set. Events that generate device-specific errors
shall not generate command errors, execution errors, or query errors; see the
other error definitions in this section.
Table 5-3. Device-Specific Errors
Error Number
Error Description [description/explanation/examples]
–310
desc = “System error”
help = ““
[Indicates that some error, termed “system error” by the device, has occurred.
This code is device-dependent.]
–321
desc = “Out of memory”
help = ““
[An internal operation needed more memory than was available.]
Query errors
An <error/event number> in the range [–499, –400] indicates that the output
queue control of the instrument has detected a problem with the message
exchange protocol described in IEEE 488.2, chapter 6. The occurrence of any
error in this class shall cause the query error bit (bit 2) in the event status reg-
ister (IEEE 488.2, section 11.5.1) to be set. These errors correspond to mes-
sage exchange protocol errors described in IEEE 488.2, section 6.5.
One of the following is true:
• An attempt is being made to read data from the output queue when no output
is either present or pending.
• Data in the output queue has been lost.
Events that generate query errors will not generate command errors, execu-
tion errors, or device-specific errors; see the other error definitions in this sec-
tion.
5-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Status Listings
SCPI-Defined Errors
Table 5-4. Query Errors
Error Number
Error Description [description/explanation/examples]
Query error
–400
[This is the generic query error for devices that cannot detect more specific
errors. This code indicates only that a Query Error as defined in IEEE 488.2,
11.5.1.1.7 and 6.3 has occurred.]
–410
Query INTERRUPTED
[Indicates that a condition causing an INTERRUPTED Query error occurred (see
IEEE 488.2, 6.3.2.3); for example, a query followed by DAB or GET before a
response was completely sent.]
–420
–430
–440
Query UNTERMINATED
[Indicates that a condition causing an UNTERMINATED Query error occurred
(see IEEE 488.2, 6.3.2.2); for example, the device was addressed to talk and an
incomplete program message was received.]
Query DEADLOCKED
[Indicates that a condition causing an DEADLOCKED Query error occurred (see
IEEE 488.2, 6.3.1.7); for example, both input buffer and output buffer are full and
the device cannot continue.]
Query UNTERMINATED after indefinite response
[Indicates that a query was received in the same program message after an
query requesting an indefinite response was executed (see IEEE 488.2, 6.5.7.5).]
5-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Status Listings
OSA Notices
OSA Notices
System control-related error messages or warnings
The OSA system changed a setting and generated a warning that the opera-
tion was performed.
Table 5-5. System Control Errors or Warnings
Error Number
Error Description [description/explanation/examples]
1000
desc = “Sensitivity forced to Auto”
help = “Sensitivity has been forced to the Auto setting because another
instrument setting was made which does not permit sensitivity to be in the
Manual setting.”
1001
1002
1003
2999
desc = “Old Mezzanine board in system”
help = “This OSA has an old mezzanine board installed. It is not necessary to
upgrade the mezzanine board but the software will not be able to correctly
determine which light source options are available.”
desc = “No Delta Marker Amplitude for“
help = “The delta marker amplitude display has been turned off due to a units
mismatch. The amplitude units of the reference marker are different than those
of the delta marker. Values in differing units cannot be compared.”
desc = “Trace length increased”
help = “Trace length has been increased because the wavelength limit function
was turned off. The minimum trace length is larger when the wavelength limit
function is off and trace length was below the new minimum value.”
desc = “The Notices list has overflowed”
help = “The Notices list has overflowed. The last entries received have been
deleted.”
5-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Status Listings
OSA Warnings
OSA Warnings
Table 5-6. OSA Warnings (1 of 11)
Error Number
Error Description [description/explanation/examples]
desc = “AutoMeasure cannot find an input signal”
5000
help = “The auto-measure procedure cannot find a usable input signal. Make
sure you have a signal connected to the optical input. Auto-measure will not
work with very small input signals. They must be measured manually.”
5001
5002
desc = “AutoAlign cannot find an input signal”
help = “The auto-align procedure cannot find a usable input signal. Make sure
you have a signal connected to the optical input.”
desc = “Cal aborted: there is no active marker”
help = “A wavelength calibration using the wavelength of the active marker was
requested. The calibration cannot be made because all markers are turned off.
Place a marker on the calibration signal and try again.”
5003
desc = “Cal aborted: trace resolution is inadequate”
help = “A wavelength calibration using the wavelength of the active marker was
requested. The calibration cannot be done because the resolution of the
marker’s trace is inadequate. Trace resolution is defined as wavelength span
divided by (trace points – 1) and must be less than 10pm. This problem can be
corrected by one or more of the following steps:
1. Reduce wavelength span
2. Increase number of trace points”
5004
desc = “Cal aborted: wavelength correction too large”
help = “A wavelength calibration was requested. The calibration was aborted
since the correction needed is larger than 2nm. Make sure you have the correct
index of refraction set. If the wavelength error is still this large the OSA may
need to be serviced. The wavelength calibration function is not intended to
apply large arbitrary offsets. Use the wavelength offset function for this
purpose.”
5-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Status Listings
OSA Warnings
Table 5-6. OSA Warnings (2 of 11)
Error Number
Error Description [description/explanation/examples]
5005
desc = “Cal aborted: amplitude correction too large”
help = “An amplitude calibration was requested. The calibration was aborted
since the correction needed is more than +3dB or less than –10dB. Make sure
you have done an Auto-Align prior to calibration. If the amplitude error is still
this large the OSA may need to be serviced. The amplitude calibration function
is not intended to apply large arbitrary offsets. Use the amplitude offset function
for this purpose.”
5006
desc = “Cal aborted: cannot find an input signal”
help = “The calibration procedure cannot find an input signal close enough to
the wavelength and/or amplitude specified. Make sure the wavelength and/or
amplitude specified for calibration are correct and verify that an input signal of
the correct wavelength and/or amplitude is connected to the optical input.”
5007
5008
desc = “Calibration aborted: signal disappeared”
help = “The calibration procedure found a signal which subsequently
disappeared. Make sure the calibration signal is connected to the optical input
and try again.”
desc = “Calibration was not successful”
help = “The requested calibration procedure did not complete successfully.
Verify the instrument setup and the presence of a valid calibration signal. This
problem can sometimes be caused by removing or changing the amplitude of the
calibration signal during the calibration procedure. In rare cases this error can
occur after the OSA has received a severe mechanical shock. Try running
AutoAlign”
5009
5010
desc = “I/O error”
help = “An error occurred while processing an input/output request”
desc = “The floppy disk is full”
help = “There is not enough free space left on the floppy disk to contain the new
file(s). Either make room on the existing floppy by deleting unwanted files or try
a different floppy disk.”
5011
desc = “There is no disk in the floppy disk drive”
help = “An operation was requested which uses the floppy disk. There is no disk
detected in the floppy disk drive. If there is a disk in the drive it may be of a
format which cannot be read. This problem can be fixed by inserting a disk in the
floppy disk drive or replacing the current disk with one which is properly
formatted.”
5-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Status Listings
OSA Warnings
Table 5-6. OSA Warnings (3 of 11)
Error Number
Error Description [description/explanation/examples]
desc = “The floppy disk is not formatted”
5012
help = “An operation was requested which uses the floppy disk. The disk
currently in the drive does not appear to be formatted. Use the format utility to
format the disk or replace it with a formatted disk.”
5013
5014
5015
desc = “The floppy disk is write protected”
help = “An operation was requested which writes to the floppy disk. The disk
currently in the drive is write-protected. Turn off write protection on the current
floppy disk or replace it with another disk.”
desc = “The internal memory is full”
help = “An operation was requested which uses internal memory. There is not
enough free space left in internal memory for this operation. You must make
room by deleting one or more files.”
desc = “Up/down keys will not alter the span when it is zero”
help = “The up/down step keys may not be used to alter the span setting when it
is zero. A non-zero numeric value must be entered for span in order to leave zero
span mode.”
5016
desc = “Incompatible measurement file”
help = “An attempt was made to recall a measurement file which is
incompatible with the current version of software.”
5017
desc = “The requested file does not exist”
help = “An attempt was made to access a file which does not exist. Check the
spelling of the file name against the listing of available files.”
5020–5030
desc = “I/O Error”
help “An unexpected error occurred during the I/O operation. Please try the
operation again. If the operation involves the floppy disk drive, try a different
floppy disk. If the error persists, please make a note of the error number and
contact the nearest Hewlett-Packard Instrument support center for assistance.
In the U.S., call (800) 403-0801. See the HP 86140 series Users Guide for a
listing of the HP sales and service offices.
5031
desc = “Could not initialize floppy”
help => “A request was made to initialize a floppy disk. The operation did not
succeed. Check to see that there is a floppy disk inserted in the drive and that
the disk is not write protected. This can also be caused by a defective floppy
disk.”
5-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Status Listings
OSA Warnings
Table 5-6. OSA Warnings (4 of 11)
Error Number
Error Description [description/explanation/examples]
5032–5043
desc = “I/O Error”
help “An unexpected error occurred during the I/O operation. Please try the
operation again. If the operation involves the floppy disk drive, try a different
floppy disk. If the error persists, please make a note of the error number and
contact the nearest Hewlett-Packard Instrument support center for assistance.
In the U.S., call (800) 403-0801. See the HP 86140 series Users Guide for a
listing of the HP sales and service offices.
5044
5045
5046
desc = “Please cycle power to synchronize system time”
help = “The system time clock has been set backwards. Due to internal system
requirements it is necessary to cycle power before continuing. Please turn
power off and back on again. This must be done to ensure proper system
operation.”
desc = “Sweep limit markers too close together”
help = “The sweep limit function is on and the line markers are too close
together. The OSA cannot limit the sweep range to such a small value. The
current sweep may be using a wider range than requested. Move the line
markers farther apart or turn off sweep limit to resolve this problem.”
desc = “AutoAlign cannot find input signal at marker”
help = “The auto-align procedure could not find a usable input signal. If there is
an active marker auto-align will attempt to align at the marker wavelength
without searching for a signal peak. This error can also occur if the input signal
amplitude is very low or if the OSA has received a large mechanical shock or if
the input signal is removed after the auto-align procedure has begun. Be sure a
signal is connected to the optical input. If there is an active marker make sure it
is placed on the input signal or turn off all markers.”
5047
5048
desc = “Signal disappeared during AutoAlign”
help = “The auto-align procedure did not complete. The input signal disappeared
during the auto-align procedure. Make sure the input signal is connected to the
optical input and try again.”
desc = “Wrong trace X axis units for peak to center”
help = “The peak-to-center function was requested. This function will only
execute if the active trace X axis has units of meters (um nm pm). Change the
active trace to one with an X axis in meters or re-measure the active trace in a
non-zero span.”
5-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Status Listings
OSA Warnings
Table 5-6. OSA Warnings (5 of 11)
Error Number
Error Description [description/explanation/examples]
desc = “Wrong marker X axis units for active trace”
5049
help = “The active marker cannot be placed on the active trace because the
desired X axis units do not match the X axis units of the active trace. This is
normally caused by recalling a wavelength trace in zero span or a zero span
trace in a wavelength span. It can also be caused by loading a trace with
conflicting units by remote control.”
5050
5051
desc = “Trace not displayed: wrong X axis units”
help = “View has been turned on for this trace but it cannot be displayed. The X
axis units in the trace do not match the X axis units being displayed. This is
normally caused by trying to view a wavelength trace in zero span or a zero span
trace in a wavelength span. It can also be caused by loading a trace with
conflicting units by remote control.”
desc = “AutoMeasure cannot find input signal at marker”
help = “The auto-measure function was requested. The auto-measure at marker
option was enabled but the active marker was not placed on a valid signal. A
valid signal was found but the active marker is too far from that signal. To
correct this problem place the marker on the desired signal turn off all markers
or disable the auto-measure at marker function.”
5052
5053
desc = “Sweep time auto is not allowed in zero span”
help = “The sweep time function was requested to switch from manual to auto
while in zero span. Automatic sweep time coupling cannot be done in zero span.
The desired sweep time must be set explicitly.”
desc = “Noise marker not allowed.”
help = “A request was made to enable the noise marker readout. The readout
cannot be enabled for one of the following reasons. Noise markers cannot be
used on traces which have X axis units other than meters. This typically occurs
in zero span where the X axis units are seconds. Noise markers cannot be used
on traces which have Y axis units other than power. This typically happens when
trace math is on and the trace Y axis represents a ratio.”
5054
desc = “Bandwidth markers are not allowed in zero span”
help = “A request was made to enable the bandwidth marker readout while the
OSA was in zero span. Bandwidth markers are not permitted when span is set to
zero. If a bandwidth marker readout is required set span to a value greater than
zero.”
5-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Status Listings
OSA Warnings
Table 5-6. OSA Warnings (6 of 11)
Error Number
Error Description [description/explanation/examples]
5055
desc = “Firmware Upgrade was not successful”
help => “A firmware upgrade operation was requested. The firmware upgrade
operation cannot be done at this time due to an internal software problem. “ + <-
.serviceCenterHelp
5056
5057
desc = “Trajectory align cannot find input signal”
help = “The trajectory align procedure cannot find a usable input signal. Make
sure you have a signal connected to the optical input.”
desc = “Invalid settings for trajectory align”
help = “The external trajectory align function was requested. It cannot be
executed because the start and/or stop wavelength settings are invalid. Start
and stop wavelengths must be between 600nm and 1700nm. In addition the
difference between start and stop wavelengths (span) must be greater than
25nm. To correct this problem adjust the start and/or stop wavelength settings
to be valid.”
5058
5059
desc = “Out of memory”
help = “The OSA has run out of execution memory. An internal function was
aborted due to lack of execution memory. The correction for this problem is to
cycle power.”
desc = “Trajectory align: marginal input signal”
help = “The trajectory align procedure was aborted due to an input signal with
marginal amplitude. The input signal was large enough when the function began
it’s operation but later became too small. This usually happens when the signal
is on the edge of being too small. To correct this problem increase the input
signal level. If this is not possible then a slight increase in signal level can
sometimes be achieved by cleaning optical fiber connectors.”
5060
5061
desc = “Trajectory align failed”
help = “The trajectory align procedure failed. The trajectory adjustments
computed were invalid. This is usually occurs after the OSA has received a large
mechanical shock. To correct this problem try the trajectory align procedure
again. If the error persists, contact the HP support center nearest your location.”
desc = “Invalid marker trace”
help = “The marker could not be positioned. The marker is on a trace which does
not contain any valid data. This is sometimes caused by a trace math result
which is invalid.”
5-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Status Listings
OSA Warnings
Table 5-6. OSA Warnings (7 of 11)
Error Number
Error Description [description/explanation/examples]
desc = “ADC Triggered Sweep Too Fast”
5062
help = “A sweep was taken with one of the ADC trigger modes enabled. The
sweep rate was too fast to allow trace data to be acquired for every
wavelength. To resolve this problem increase sweep time or increase the
frequency the external trigger input signal.”
5063
5064
5065
desc = “Key disabled during applications”
help = “The key you pressed is not active while an application is running. Exiting
the application should re-enable the key.”
desc = “Invalid measurement file”
help = “An attempt was made to recall a measurement file which is contains
invalid or corrupt data.”
desc = “Error detected in DSP sub-system”
help = “ The Digital Signal Processor has reported an unexpected error. Please
record the hexadecimal number listed with the error and cycle power. If the error
persists, contact the HP support center nearest your location.”
6700
6701
desc = “Math expression input parameter undefined.”
help = “A math expression could not be evaluated because one or more input
arguments are undefined. Please check the spelling of all input arguments.”
desc = “Math expression input parameter has error.”
help = “A math expression could not be evaluated because an error is present on
one or more of the input arguments. The error must be cleared before the
expression can be evaluated.”
6702
desc = “Math expression parameter has zero length.”
help = “A math expression could not be evaluated because one or more input
arguments has a zero length. This is often caused when the subset of a trace
contains no points such as when advanced line marker functions are turned on
and the line markers are too close together. It can also be caused when peak/pit
searches find no peaks or pits.”
6720
6721
desc = “Math expression input parameter has error.”
help = “A math expression could not be evaluated because of improper input
arguments. This could be due to one or more input arguments having the wrong
type or size or because one or more inputs are not defined.”
desc = “Internal error in marker search”
help => “A marker search function has failed due to an internal software
problem. Please try the operation again. If the error persists, contact the HP
support center nearest your location.”
5-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Status Listings
OSA Warnings
Table 5-6. OSA Warnings (8 of 11)
Error Number
Error Description [description/explanation/examples]
6722
desc = “Math expression input cannot be boolean.”
help = “A math expression could not be evaluated because one or more of the
input arguments is boolean. This function does not allow boolean input
arguments.”
6723
desc = “Trace X axis values do not match.”
help = “A math expression could not be evaluated because the input arguments
have differing X axis values. This function requires that all input arguments have
identical X axis values. All trace inputs must be taken with identical start/stop
settings.”
6724
6725
6726
6727
desc = “Error in source trace”
help => “The source trace has an error. The error may possibly be that the source
trace contains no points. Please try the operation again. If the error persists,
contact the HP support center nearest your location.”
desc = “Trace lengths do not match.”
help = “A math expression could not be evaluated because the inputs have
differing sizes (trace lengths). All inputs to this function must be of the same
size.”
desc = “Trace lengths do not match.”
help = “A math expression could not be evaluated because the inputs have
differing sizes (trace lengths). All inputs to this function must be of the same
size.”
desc = “Y axis counts do not match.”
help = “A math expression could not be evaluated because the inputs have
differing numbers of Y axis data. All input arguments to this function must have
the same number of Y axis data points.”
6728
6729
6730
desc = “Incorrect number of inputs for math expression”
help = “A math expression could not be evaluated because the number of input
arguments to the function is incorrect.”
desc = “Math expression expects units of dBm.”
help = “A math expression could not be evaluated because the input argument
does not have the required Y axis units of dBm.”
desc = “Math expression expects units of watts.”
help = “A math expression could not be evaluated because the input argument
does not have the required Y axis units of watts.”
5-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Status Listings
OSA Warnings
Table 5-6. OSA Warnings (9 of 11)
Error Number
Error Description [description/explanation/examples]
desc = “Illegal combination of trace Y axis units”
6731
help = “A math expression could not be evaluated because the combination of Y
axis units in the input arguments do not make sense. For example it is valid to
divide watts by watts or to divide watts by a unitless value but it is invalid to
divide a unitless value by watts.”
6732
6733
desc = “Illegal combination of trace X axis units”
help = “A math expression could not be evaluated because the input arguments
have differing X axis units. All input arguments must have identical X axis units.
This commonly happens when trace math is attempted between a zero span
trace (time units) and a non-zero span trace (wavelength units).”
desc = “Invalid combination of Y axis units”
help = “A math expression could not be evaluated because of an invalid
combination of Y axis units. The math operation being performed only allows
one of the arguments to have units. All other arguments must be unitless. The
math operator is shown in parenthesis in the short message above. For example
multiplying a trace in watts (dBm) by another trace in watts (dBm) is not
permitted.”
6734
6735
6736
6737
6738
desc = “Too many inputs have Y axis units”
help = “A math expression could not be evaluated because of an invalid
combination of inputs. Only one input argument is allowed to have non-blank Y
axis units.”
desc = “Trace has too many Y axes”
help = “A math expression could not be evaluated because of an invalid input.
One of the arguments contains multiple sets of Y data. Only one set of Y data is
allowed for this math function.”
desc = “Math expression expects boolean inputs.”
help = “A math expression could not be evaluated because of an invalid input.
The math function requires all of it’s arguments to be boolean. At least one of
the arguments is not boolean.”
desc = “Invalid math constant”
help = “During evaluation of a math expression an invalid constant was
encountered. The constant has undefined or default settings for it’s X and/or Y
values.”
desc = “Out of memory”
help = “A trace or math operation was requested. There is insufficient memory
available to perform the operation. Try reducing trace length or cycle power.”
5-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Status Listings
OSA Warnings
Table 5-6. OSA Warnings (10 of 11)
Error Number
Error Description [description/explanation/examples]
6739
desc = “Too many peaks or pits”
help = “A marker search operation was requested. There are too many valid pits
or peaks in the current trace. Reduce the number of valid pits or peaks by
increasing the peak or pit excursion setting.”
6741
6742
desc = “Constant with multiple Y values”
help = “During evaluation of a math expression a constant was encountered
which contains more than one Y value. Constants are only permitted to have one
Y value.”
desc = “Requested amplitude not found”
help = “A math expression to search for a specific amplitude in a trace did not
succeed. There are no trace points with the desired amplitude.”
6744
6745
desc = “Excursion should be in dB”
help = “The units for the excursion are not in dB.”
desc = “Log of a negative number is not allowed.”
help = “During evaluation of a math expression the logarithm of a negative
number was encountered.”
6746
desc = “Math expression contains a circular reference.”
help = “A new math expression was entered. The expression was rejected
because it would create a circular reference. For example if trace math for trace
C is set to (A-B) then setting trace math for trace B to (C+D) would create a
circular reference.”
6747
6748
6749
desc = “Next peak not found”
help = “A next-peak search was requested. There are no more peaks on the
current marker’s trace in the requested direction. To find additional peaks
reduce the marker peak excursion setting or adjust sensitivity.”
desc = “Next pit not found”
help = “A next-pit search was requested. There are no more pits on the current
marker’s trace in the requested direction. To find additional pits reduce the
marker pit excursion setting or adjust sensitivity.”
desc = “Peak not found”
help = “A peak search was requested. There are no valid peaks on the current
marker’s trace. Try decreasing the marker peak excursion setting or adjust the
sensitivity setting.”
5-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Status Listings
OSA Warnings
Table 5-6. OSA Warnings (11 of 11)
Error Number
Error Description [description/explanation/examples]
desc = “Pit not found”
6750
help = “A pit search was requested. There are no valid pits on the current
marker’s trace. Try decreasing the marker pit excursion setting or adjust the
sensitivity setting.”
6751
6752
desc = “Trace has no centroid”
help = “The trace has no centroid. This may occur because the sum of trace
points’ amplitudes is zero or there a no trace points.”
desc = “The reference point is outside trace bounds”
help = “The reference point’s wavelength is either too small or too large. The
reference point will be clipped to a trace endpoint.”
6753
6754
desc = “The window specified is invalid.”
help = “The window specified is invalid. The window should be a constant.”
desc = “Search failed: no data”
help = “A marker search operation was requested. After clipping the trace data
to screen limits and line marker limits (if enabled) there was no data to search.
This can be caused when all trace data points are beyond current X axis screen
limits or when there are no trace data points between the line markers. Trace
data values which exceed the current Y axis screen limits will not cause this
problem. Adjust the current X axis screen limits and/or move the line markers to
include at least one trace data point.”
6755
6756
desc = “Attempt to divide by 0”
help = “At least one point was attempted to be divided by 0. The result for these
divisions has been set to not-a-number. Please realize that further calculations
with not-a-number values are undefined.”
desc = “Syntax error; bad token: “
help = “The grammar expression entered cannot be parsed. Please check the
string entered. The bad token attempts to indicate where the error occurred. The
end of line indicates that the OSA expected more information. Please consult
the manual for additional help.”
7998
7999
desc = “Unknown error detected”
help = “An unlisted error was reported by the instrument software. If this error
persists contact Hewlett-Packard for assistance.”
desc = “The warning list has overflowed”
help = “The Warning list has overflowed. The last entries received have been
deleted.”
5-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Status Listings
Application-Specific Warnings
Application-Specific Warnings
Table 5-7. Application-Specific Warnings (1 of 6)
Error Number
Error Description [description/explanation/examples]
8001
desc = “Incorrect application type is listed in spec file.”
help = “The application expects the first non-comment line of the specification
file to contain the APPLICATION keyword followed by the application type.
Either the APPLICATION keyword was missing or the wrong application type
was specified for this particular application.”
8002
8003
desc = “A keyword cannot be used as a variable name.”
help = “The application has a list of keywords reserved for specification file use.
These reserved words cannot be used as a name for one of the measurement
parameters.”
desc = “The variable name has already been used.”
help = “The application allows new names to be assigned to measurement
parameters. Once assigned these names can only be used as inputs to other
measurements. Only the first ten characters are significant. The line number
indicates where the problem was found. The word in the parentheses is the
variable name causing the problem.”
8004
8005
desc = “Wrong number of input parameters.”
help = “The wrong number of inputs were found for a specification file
command. The line number listed is where the problem was found in the
specification file. The first number in parentheses is the number of inputs found
and the second number is the number of inputs required.”
desc = “An input parameter has the wrong units.”
help = “One of the input parameters to the specification file has the wrong units
specified. The line number listed is where the problem was found in the
specification file. The first units listed in the parentheses was the units used by
the parameter and the second units is the units required by the parameter. An
empty pair of quotes ‘’ indicates unitless.”
5-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Status Listings
Application-Specific Warnings
Table 5-7. Application-Specific Warnings (2 of 6)
Error Number
Error Description [description/explanation/examples]
desc = “The specification file cannot be imported.”
8006
help = “An error occurred while trying to import the specification file. Refer to
the previous warnings for more information on specific errors in the
specification file.”
8007
8008
8009
desc = “The specification file has a syntax error.”
help = “One of the specification file lines has a syntax problem. The problem
occurred on the line number listed. The string in the parentheses caused the
problem.”
desc = “A variable was used where a constant is expected.”
help = “A variable name was used as a parameter where only a constant value
or the DEFAULT keyword is allowed. The line number indicates where the
problem was found. The variable name in the parentheses caused the problem.”
desc = “The variable name has not been defined.”
help = “An undefined variable name was used as a parameter for a
specification. All variables used as parameters must be defined in a
specification statement preceding the variable’s use. The line number indicates
where the problem was found. The variable name in the parentheses is the
undefined variable.”
8010
8011
desc = “A variable can be used only once per statement.”
help = “A variable name was used as multiple parameters for the same
specification statement. The input parameter was ignored because using
multiple references is not allowed. The line number indicates where the problem
was found. The variable name in the parentheses is the variable causing the
problem.”
desc = “A keyword was used where a variable is expected.”
help = “The application specification file has a list of reserved words which are
used to specify the measurements to be made. These keywords cannot be used
as input parameters for specification statements. The input parameter was
ignored for this case. The line number indicates where the problem was found.
The word in the parentheses is the reserved word causing the problem.”
8012
8013
desc = “A label is required to identify the spec file.”
help = “The label string is used to identify the specification file. It is required
after specifying the application type. An empty string (pair of double quotes) is
acceptable input.”
desc = “The specification file cannot be exported.”
help = “An error occurred while trying to export the specification file.”
5-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Status Listings
Application-Specific Warnings
Table 5-7. Application-Specific Warnings (3 of 6)
Error Number
Error Description [description/explanation/examples]
8014
desc = “Print statement ignored: no path is specified”
help = “The PRINT statement needs to be after a PATH statement to indicate
which PATH data is to be printed. The PRINT statement at the line number
specified came before any PATH statement. This PRINT statement will not
trigger any printouts.”
8015
desc = “DEFAULT cannot be used for a parameter.”
help = “A parameter cannot be specified as DEFAULT. The parameter needs to
be either a previously defined variable name or an actual value. The bad
parameter was found on the line number specified. The number in the
parentheses is the number of the parameter causing the problem.”
8016
8017
8018
desc = “A duplicate command is in the spec file.”
help = “Certain commands should be used only once in the specification file. The
duplicate command was found on the line number specified. The command in
the parentheses is the duplicate.”
desc = “A required command is missing from the spec file.”
help = “Certain commands must be used in the specification file. The missing
command is listed in the parentheses. This command should be used only once
in the file.”
desc = “The normalization interval limited to maximum.”
help = “The normalization interval has a maximum value of 24 and a minimum
value of 0.1 hours. The interval specified in the specification file is outside this
range. The specification file can still be used but the calibration interval will be
24 hours.”
8019
8020
desc = “The spec file could not be loaded.”
help = “The application found a problem with the specification file. Possible
causes can include the following: the file is incompatible with the application
the file is from a previous version of the application the file was corrupted. The
file with the problem is specified within the parentheses. Try re-importing the
specification file.”
desc = “The default spec file was loaded.”
help = “The default specification file for the application was loaded. This is done
when the application is first started or if a problem occurred when trying to load
another specification file. Refer to the previous warnings for information on any
problems loading another file.”
5-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Status Listings
Application-Specific Warnings
Table 5-7. Application-Specific Warnings (4 of 6)
Error Number
Error Description [description/explanation/examples]
desc = “The spec file could not be found.”
8021
help = “The application tried to load a specification file which could not be found
in the internal memory. This may have occurred if the last file used by the
application was deleted. The filename is specified within the parentheses.”
8022
8023
desc = “A closing quote is missing.”
help = “The specification file contained a line with an opening quote but no
closing quote could be found.”
desc = “A default path name was used.”
help = “The imported specification file was given a default path name. All
specification files must have at least one PATH statement before any of the
measurement statements. A default path name was used either because some
measurement statements were used before a PATH statement or there was no
PATH statement at all in the file.”
8024
8025
desc = “A variable is expected.”
help = “The statement expected a variable as an input parameter. The line
number indicates which statement did not have the proper input parameter
type.”
desc = “The path name has already been used.”
help = “The application allows new names to be assigned to measurement
paths. Once assigned these names can no longer be used by other measurement
paths. Only the first thirty-two characters are significant. The line number
indicates where the problem was found. The word in the parentheses is the path
name causing the problem.”
8026
8027
desc = “A path name was used where a variable is expected.”
help = “The input parameters for measurement statements can take variables as
inputs. These variables are the results of other measurement statements. A path
name is the name of a measurement path not the result of a measurement and
cannot be used as an input parameter. The input parameter was ignored for this
case. The line number indicates where the problem was found. The word in the
parentheses is the path name causing the problem.”
desc = “A parameter value was outside the legal range.”
help = “A parameter value was used which was outside the allowable range.
The first number in the parentheses is the number of the parameter causing the
problem. The other two numbers are the minimum and maximum values
allowed. These values are in base units (e.g meters watts).”
5-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Status Listings
Application-Specific Warnings
Table 5-7. Application-Specific Warnings (5 of 6)
Error Number
Error Description [description/explanation/examples]
8028
desc = “A minimum non-zero span is required.”
help = “The application cannot run in a zero span setting. The start and stop
wavelength must be separated by a minimum span. The line number indicates
the line in the specification file which had a start and stop wavelength pair that
did not meed the minimum span requirement.”
8029
8030
8031
8032
desc = “The requested function is not yet implemented.”
help = “The statement within the specification file is not implemented in this
version of the application. The word in parentheses has been reserved for future
use. The statement at the specified line number needs to be removed before the
specification file can be imported.”
desc = “A SETUP statement is needed before SWEEP.”
help = “The wavelength limits of the SWEEP statement are checked against the
wavelength limits in the SETUP statement. This check requires that the SETUP
statement occur before the SWEEP statement. The line number indicates which
SWEEP statement is not preceded by the SETUP statement.”
desc = “The SWEEP limits are outside the SETUP range.”
help = “The start and stop values for the SWEEP statement must be within the
start and stop values of the SETUP statement. The line number indicates which
SWEEP statement has values out of range. The number in the parentheses
indicates which parameter is out of range.”
desc = “The units of the inputs are not compatible.”
help = “The units of the inputs to a math operation need to be compatible with
the operation desired. Addition and subtraction need to have matching units.
Multiplication needs to have a unitless parameter. Division needs a unitless
denominator or the units for the numerator and denominator need to match. The
line number indicates which statement had the mismatched input units.”
8033
8034
desc = “The reference point is outside the SETUP range.”
help = “The reference point value must be within the start and stop values of the
SETUP statement. The line number indicates which statement had the value out
of range.”
desc = “The values are associated with different axes.”
help = “The variables used in a basic math operation like ADD or DIV must be
associated with the same data axis (e.g. wavelength or amplitude). Mixing the
axes values within a single math operation is not allowed. The line number
indicates which statement had the incompatible variables.”
5-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Status Listings
Application-Specific Warnings
Table 5-7. Application-Specific Warnings (6 of 6)
Error Number
Error Description [description/explanation/examples]
desc = “The search limits are outside the SETUP range.”
8035
help = “The search limits for statements like PEAK or CENTER_OF_MASS must
be within the start and stop values of the SETUP statement. The line number
indicates which statement has values out of range. The number in the
parentheses indicates which parameter is out of range.”
8036
8037
desc = “The specification units do not match.”
help = “The units for the minimum and maximum specification values need to
match. The line number indicates which statement has the mismatching units.”
desc = “The specification units do not match the input units.”
help = “The units for the minimum and maximum specification values need to
match the units for the input parameters. The line number indicates which
statement has the mismatching units.”
5-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Status Listings
OSA Status Errors
OSA Status Errors
Table 5-8. OSA Status Errors
Error Number
Error Description [description/explanation/examples]
10000
desc = “Sweep Uncalibrated”
help = “The current setting of sweep time may be too fast. This could result in an
invalid measurement. In certain cases it is possible to sweep faster than the
coupled sweep time without compromising measurement accuracy. Please refer
to the users manual and relevant application notes for more information.”
11998
desc = “Too Many Hardware Status Errors”
help = “The Hardware Status Error list has overflowed. Additional more recent
items have been deleted.”
5-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Status Listings
OSA Errors
OSA Errors
Table 5-9. OSA Errors (1 of 2)
Error Number
Error Description [description/explanation/examples]
desc = “Error detected in ADC sub-system”
20001
help = “An error has been detected in the Analog-to-Digital converter
subsystem. Please record the hexadecimal number listed with the error and
cycle power. If the error persists, contact the nearest Hewlett-Packard
Instrument support center for assistance. In the U.S., call (800) 403-0801. See
the HP 86140 series Users Guide for a listing of the HP sales and service
offices.”
20002
desc = “Error detected in slit positioning system”
help = “An error has been detected in the motor which controls the resolution
bandwidth slit wheel. Please record the hexadecimal number listed with the
error and cycle power. If the error persists, contact the nearest Hewlett-Packard
Instrument support center for assistance. In the U.S., call (800) 403- 0801. See
the HP 86140 series Users Guide for a listing of the HP sales and service
offices.”
20003
20004
desc = “Error detected in grating positioning system”
help = “An error has been detected in the motor which controls the diffraction
grating. Please record the hexadecimal number listed with the error and cycle
power. If the error persists, contact the nearest Hewlett-Packard Instrument
support center for assistance. In the U.S., call (800) 403-0801. See the HP 86140
series Users Guide for a listing of the HP sales and service offices.”
desc = “Monochromator calibration data is invalid”
help = “Factory calibration data for the monochromator is invalid. Please record
the hexadecimal number listed with the error and cycle power. If the error
persists, contact the nearest Hewlett-Packard Instrument support center for
assistance. In the U.S., call (800) 403-0801. See the HP 86140 series Users
Guide for a listing of the HP sales and service offices.”
5-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Status Listings
OSA Errors
Table 5-9. OSA Errors (2 of 2)
Error Number
Error Description [description/explanation/examples]
20005
desc = “Trans-Impedance calibration data is invalid”
help = “Factory calibration data for the trans-impedance amplifier is invalid.
Please record the hexadecimal number listed with the error and cycle power. If
the error persists, contact the nearest Hewlett-Packard Instrument support
center for assistance. In the U.S., call (800) 403-0801. See the HP 86140 series
Users Guide for a listing of the HP sales and service offices.”
20006
20007
21999
desc = “Monochromator flatness calibration data is invalid”
help = “Factory flatness data for the monochromator is invalid. Please record the
hexadecimal number listed with the error and cycle power. If the error persists,
contact the nearest Hewlett-Packard Instrument support center for assistance.
In the U.S., call (800) 403-0801. See the HP 86140 series Users Guide for a
listing of the HP sales and service offices.“
desc = “Sweep Timeout”
help = “A sweep was started but did not finish in the expected amount of time.
The trace data acquired during this sweep may not be valid. Try taking another
sweep. If the error persists, contact the nearest Hewlett-Packard Instrument
support center for assistance. In the U.S., call (800) 403-0801. See the HP 86140
series Users Guide for a listing of the HP sales and service offices.”
desc = “The Error list has overflowed”
help = “The Error list has overflowed. The last entries received have been
deleted.”
5-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Status Listings
Firmware Errors
Firmware Errors
Table 5-10. Firmware Errors
Error Number
Error Description [description/explanation/examples]
desc = “Internal Communications Error”
30000
help = “An internal software error has occurred involving communications
between different software processes. Please record this error including the
extra text and cycle power. If the error persists, contact the nearest Hewlett-
Packard Instrument support center for assistance. In the U.S., call (800) 403-
0801. See the HP 86140 series Users Guide for a listing of the HP sales and
service offices.”
30001
desc = “Auto-Measure Software Error”
help = “An error has been detected in the auto-measure software. There is an
internal problem with the software. Please make a note of the text in
parentheses at the end of the error message and cycle power. If the error
persists, contact the nearest Hewlett-Packard Instrument support center for
assistance. In the U.S., call (800) 403-0801. See the HP 86140 series Users
Guide for a listing of the HP sales and service offices.”
5-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Status Listings
Firmware Errors
5-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6
AC Line-Power Cords 6-4
Front-Panel Fiber-Optic Adapters 6-6
Printer Head Cleaning Procedure 6-7
Cleaning Connections for Accurate Measurements 6-10
Returning the Instrument for Service 6-21
Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service Offices 6-24
Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference
Options and Accessories
Options and Accessories
Table 6-1. Options and Accessories (1 of 2)
Option/HP
Part Number
Description
004
005
006
Built-in 1300 nm/1550 nm EELED Source
Built-in 1550 nm EELED Source
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
Wavelength Calibration Sourcea
❍
❍
❍
❍
Certificate of Calibration (included)
Alternative Connector Interface:
Standard
011
FC/PC
HMS-10
DIN
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
013
014
ST
017
SC
Additional Connector Interfaces
See HP 81000 series
b
9270-1370
C4735A
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
Printer paper (box of 5 rolls)
101/102 Keyboard (OSA requires US layout)
PS/2 Style Mouse
C3751B
Option 030
Option AX4
9211-2657
External 10 dB Attenuator (FC/PC)
Rackmount Flange Kit
Transit Case
6-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference
Options and Accessories
Table 6-1. Options and Accessories (2 of 2)
Option/HP
Part Number
Description
9211-5604
Option 042
HP N1031A
Transit Case
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
Soft Carrying Case
BenchLink Softwarec (included)
❍
❍
a. Contact your local field representative for availability.
b. Always use HP paper. Use of other thermal paper may degrade image quality and damage the printer
head.
c. HP N1031A BenchLink software allows transfer of measurement results over an HP-IB interface to a PC
for the purposes of archiving, printing and further analysis.
6-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference
AC Line-Power Cords
AC Line-Power Cords
Cable Part
Plug Description
No.
Length
(in/cm)
Plug Type
Color
Country
250V
8120-1351
8120-1703
Straight *BS1363A
90/228
90/228
Gray
United Kingdom,
Cyprus, Nigeria,
Zimbabwe,
90°
Mint Gray
Singapore
250V
250V
8120-1369
8120-0696
Straight *NZSS198/
ASC
79/200
87/221
Gray
Australia, New
Zealand
Mint Gray
90°
8120-1689
8120-1692
8120-2857p
Straight *CEE7-Y11
90°
79/200
79/200
79/200
Mint Gray
Mint Gray
Coco Brown
East and West
Europe, Saudi
Arabia, So. Africa,
India (unpolarized in
many nations)
Straight (Shielded)
125V
250V
8120-1378
8120-1521
8120-1992
Straight *NEMA5-15P
90/228
90/228
96/244
Jade Gray
Jade Gray
Black
United States,
Canada, Mexico,
Philippines, Taiwan
90°
Straight (Medical)
UL544
8120-2104
8120-2296
Straight *SEV1011
1959-24507
79/200
79/200
Mint Gray
Mint Gray
Switzerland
Denmark
Type 12 90°
Straight *DHCK107
90°
220V
250V
8120-2956
8120-2957
79/200
79/200
Mint Gray
Mint Gray
8120-4211
8120-4600
Straight SABS164
79/200
79/200
Jade Gray
Republic of South
Africa
90°
India
* Part number shown for plug is the industry identifier for the plug only. Number shown for
cable is the HP part number for the complete cable including the plug.
6-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference
AC Line-Power Cords
Cable Part
No.
Length
(in/cm)
Plug Type
Plug Description
Color
Country
100V
8120-4753
8120-4754
Straight MITI
90/230
90/230
Dark Gray
Japan
90°
* Part number shown for plug is the industry identifier for the plug only. Number shown for
cable is the HP part number for the complete cable including the plug.
6-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference
Printer Head Cleaning Procedure
Printer Head Cleaning Procedure
Lint from normal use of the printer may eventually collect on the printer head
and degrade print quality. Use the procedure provided in this section to clean
the printer head.
WA R N IN G
C A U T I O N
This servicing procedure is for use by qualified personnel only. To
avoid electrical shock, do not perform this procedure unless you are
qualified to do so.
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage or destroy the printer. Therefore,
Static-safe Work
Station
Figure 6-1 on page 6-8 shows an example of a static-safe work station using
conductive table and floor mats and wrist and heel straps. To ensure user
Ω
safety, the static-safe accessories must provide at least 1 M of isolation from
ground. Refer to Table 6-2 for information on ordering static-safe accessories.
Table 6-2. Static-Safe Accessories
HP Part Number
Description
9300-0797
3M static control mat 0.6 m × 1.2 m (2 ft× 4 ft) and 4.6 cm (15 ft) ground
wire. (The wrist-strap and wrist-strap cord are not included. They must be
ordered separately.)
9300-0980
9300-1383
Wrist-strap cord 1.5 m (5 ft).
Wrist-strap, color black, stainless steel, without cord, has four adjustable
links and a 7 mm post-type connection.
9300-1169
ESD heel-strap (reusable 6 to 12 months).
6-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference
Printer Head Cleaning Procedure
Figure 6-1. Example of a static-safe workstation
Procedure
1
2
3
Turn off the HP 86140-series optical spectrum analyzer, and remove the line
power cord.
Place the instrument at a static-safe work station as described in the
introduction to this procedure.
Use a coin or screwdriver to open the printer door that is located on the top of
the instrument.
C A U T I O N
Avoid dropping the coin or screwdriver, used to open the printer door, into the
printer assembly.
4
Lift up the paper latch as shown in the following diagram, and remove the
paper.
6-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference
Printer Head Cleaning Procedure
5
Unscrew the retaining screw that secures the sheet-metal cover that protects
the printer head from electrostatic discharge. Slide the sheet-metal cover
towards the retaining screw and then lift it straight up to remove.
6
7
Lift the printer head lever to the vertical position. Then, tilt the lever towards
the instrument’s rear panel to rotate the printer head up.
Clean the printer head using a cotton swab and isopropyl alcohol.
Use of other cleaning materials or fluids may damage the printer.
C A U T I O N
8
After the printer head has thoroughly dried, use the printer head lever to
return the printer head to its original position.
9
Replace and secure the sheet-metal cover for the printer head.
Replace the printer paper, and close the printer access door.
10
6-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference
Cleaning Connections for Accurate Measurements
Cleaning Connections for Accurate
Measurements
Advances in measurement capabilities make connectors and connection tech-
niques more important than ever. Damage to the connectors on calibration
and verification devices, test ports, cables, and other devices can increase
downtime and expense.
Refer to “Cleaning Optical Connectors” on page 6-17 for suggestions which
will help you get the best performance from your connectors.
Many times an instrument must be serviced to replace a damaged connector.
Thousands of dollars and hours, or even days, of lost time can be avoided if
Inspecting Connectors 6-13
Measuring insertion loss and return loss 6-16
Visual inspection of fiber ends 6-17
Cleaning Optical Connectors 6-17
Cleaning a non-lensed connector 6-18
Cleaning an adapter 6-19
6-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference
Cleaning Connections for Accurate Measurements
Choosing the Right Connector
A critical, but often overlooked, factor in making a good lightwave measure-
ment is the selection and care of the fiber-optic connector. The differences in
connector types are mainly in the mechanical assembly that holds the ferrule
in position against another identical ferrule. Connectors also vary in the pol-
ish, curve, and concentricity of the core within the cladding. Mating one style
of cable to another requires an adapter. Hewlett-Packard offers adapters for
most instruments to allow testing with many different cables.
The system tolerance for reflection and insertion loss must be known when
selecting a connector from the wide variety currently available. Some items to
consider when selecting a connector are:
• How much insertion loss can be allowed?
• Will the connector need to make multiple connections? Some connectors are
better than others, and some are very poor for making repeated connections.
• What is the reflection tolerance? Can the system take reflection degradation?
• Is an instrument-grade connector with a precision core alignment required?
• Is repeatability tolerance for reflection and loss important? Do your specifica-
tions take repeatability uncertainty into account?
• Will a connector degrade the return loss too much, or will a fusion splice be re-
quired? For example, many DFB lasers cannot operate with reflections from
connectors. Often as much as 90 dB isolation is needed.
Over the last few years the FC/PC style connector has emerged as the most
popular connector for fiber-optic applications. While not the highest perform-
ing connector, it represents a good compromise between performance, reli-
ability, and cost. If properly maintained and cleaned, this connector can
withstand many repeated connections.
However, many instrument specifications require tighter tolerances than most
connectors, including the FC/PC can deliver. These instruments cannot toler-
ate connectors with the large non-concentricities of the fiber common with
ceramic style ferrules. When tighter alignment is required, HP instruments
typically use a connector such as the Diamond HMS-10, which has concentric
tolerances within a few tenths of a micron. HP then uses a special universal
adapter which allow other cable types to mate with this precision connector.
6-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference
Cleaning Connections for Accurate Measurements
Universal adapters to Diamond HMS_10.
The HMS-10 encases the fiber within a soft nickel silver (CuNiZn) center
which is surrounded by a tough tungsten carbide casing, as shown in
Figure 6-2.
Staking Groove
(Fixing oper.)
Secondary Staking
(Active C entering)
Tungsten Carbide
(Hard Case)
Nickel Silver (Cu/Ni/Zn)
(Soft center)
125 um Fiber
(Centered to about
0.2 microns)
Figure 6-2. Cross-section of the Diamond HMS-10 connector.
The nickel silver allows an active centering process that permits the glass fiber
to be moved to the desired position. This process first stakes the nickel silver
to fix the fiber in a near-center position., then uses a post-active staking to
µ
shift the fiber into the desired position within 0.2 m. This process, plus the
keyed axis, allows very precise core-to-core alignments. This connector is
found on most HP lightwave instruments.
The soft core, while allowing precise centering, is also the chief liability of this
connector. The soft material is easily damaged. Care must be taken to mini-
mize excessive scratching and wear. While minor wear is not a problem if the
glass face is not affected, scratches or grit can cause the glass fiber to move
out of alignment. Also, if unkeyed connectors are used, the nickel silver can be
pushed onto the glass surface. Scratches, fiber movement, or glass contamina-
tion will cause loss of signal and increased reflections, resulting in poor return
loss.
6-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference
Cleaning Connections for Accurate Measurements
Inspecting Connectors
Because fiber-optic connectors are susceptible to damage that is not immedi-
ately obvious to the naked eye, bad measurements can be made without the
user even being aware of a connector problem. Although microscopic exami-
nation and return loss measurements are the best way to ensure good connec-
tions, they are not always practical. An awareness of potential problems, along
with good cleaning practices, can ensure that optimum connector perfor-
endface, can have a significant effect on connector performance. Many times
an instrument must be serviced to replace a damaged connector when thou-
sands of dollars and lost time could have been avoided if better care were
given to the fiber-optic connector.
Figure 6-3 is a close-up micrograph of a clean cable endface. In contrast,
Figure 6-4 shows a connector endface that was either not cleaned, or not
properly cleaned. Material is smeared and ground into the endface causing
light scattering and poor reflection. Not only is the precision polish lost, but
this action can grind off the glass face and destroy the connector.
Figure 6-3. A clean and problem-free connector
6-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference
Cleaning Connections for Accurate Measurements
Figure 6-4. A dirty endface from poor cleaning
Repeated connections made without removing loose particles, or using
improper cleaning tools can lead to physical damage of the glass fiber endface,
as shown in Figure 6-4. When severe, the damage on one connector end can
be transferred to another good connector that comes in contact with it.
Figure 6-5. A damaged fiber end from using an improper cleaning procedure
The cure for these problems is disciplined connector care. as described in the
following list and in “Cleaning Connections for Accurate Measurements” on
page 6-10.
6-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference
Cleaning Connections for Accurate Measurements
Guidelines
Use the following guidelines to achieve the best possible performance when
making measurements on a fiber-optic system:
• Keep connectors covered when not in use.
• Use dry connections whenever possible.
• Never use metal or sharp objects to clean the connector and never scrape the
connector.
• Avoid matching gel and oils.
While these often work well on first insertion, they are great dirt magnets. The
oil or gel grabs and holds grit that is then ground into the fiber endface. Also,
some early gels were designed for use with the FC, non-contacting connec-
tors, using small glass spheres. When used with contacting connectors, these
glass balls can scratch and pit the fiber. If an index matching gel or oil must be
used, apply it to a freshly cleaned connector, make the measurement, and
then immediately clean it off. Never use a gel for longer-term connections and
never use it to improve a damaged connector. The gel can mask the extent of
damage and continued use of a damaged fiber can transfer damage to the
instrument.
• When inserting a fiber-optic cable into a connector or adapter, gently insert it
in as straight a line as possible. Make sure the fiber end does not touch the out-
side of the mating connector or adapter. Tipping and inserting at an angle can
scrape material off the inside of the connector or even break the inside sleeve
of connectors made with ceramic material.
• Avoid over tightening connections.
not
Unlike common electrical connections, tighter is
better. The purpose of
the connector is to bring the endfaces of two fibers together. Once they touch,
tightening only causes a greater force to be applied to the delicate endfaces.
With some connectors, the end can set itself off-axis with a tight connection,
due to the curved face, resulting in misalignment and excessive return loss.
Many measurements are actually improved by backing off the connector pres-
sure. Also, if a piece of grit does happen to get by the cleaning procedure, the
tighter connection is more likely to damage the glass. Tighten the connectors
just until the two fibers touch.
• Keep connections covered when not in use.
6-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference
Cleaning Connections for Accurate Measurements
• Use fusion splices on the more permanent critical nodes. Choose the best con-
nector possible. Replace connecting cables regularly. Frequently measure the
every
return loss of the connector to check for degradation, and clean
every
connec-
tor,
time.
All connectors should be treated like the high-quality lens of a good camera.
The weak link in instrument and system reliability is often the inappropriate
use and care of the connector. Because current connectors are so easy to use,
there tends to be reduced vigilance in connector care and cleaning. It takes
only one missed cleaning for a piece of grit to permanently damage the glass
and ruin the connector.
Measuring insertion loss and return loss
Consistent measurements with your lightwave equipment are a good indica-
tion that you have good connections. Since return loss and insertion loss are
key factors in determining optical performance they can be used to determine
connector degradation. A smooth, polished fiber end should produce a good
return loss measurement. The quality of the polish establishes the difference
between the “PC” (physical contact) and the “Super PC” connectors. Most
connectors today are physical contact which make glass-to-glass connections,
therefore it is critical that the area around the glass core be clean and free of
scratches. Although the major area of a connector, excluding the glass, may
show scratches and wear, if the glass has maintained its polished smoothness,
the connector can still provide a good low level return loss connection.
If you test your cables and accessories for insertion loss and return loss upon
receipt, and retain the measured data for comparison, in the future you will be
able to tell if any degradation has occurred. Typical values are less than 0.5 dB
of loss, and sometimes as little as 0.1 dB of loss with high performance con-
nectors. Return loss is a measure of reflection: the less reflections the better.
The larger the return loss, the smaller the reflection. The most physically con-
tacting connectors have return losses better than 50 dB, although 30 to 40 dB
is more common.
6-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference
Cleaning Connections for Accurate Measurements
Visual inspection of fiber ends
Visual inspection of fiber ends can be helpful. Contamination or imperfections
on the cable end can be detected, as well as cracks or chips in the fiber itself.
Use a microscope with 100× to 200× magnification to inspect the entire end
face for contamination, raised metal, or dents in the metal as well as any other
imperfections. Inspect the fiber for cracks and chips. Visible imperfections not
touching the fiber core may not affect performance, unless the imperfections
keep the fibers from contacting.
Cleaning Optical Connectors
C A U T I O N
not
The connectors on the instrument are
easily cleaned. Before connecting
very
cables to the lightwave instrument, it is
following the procedures in this section.
important they are cleaned
The procedures in this section provide the proper steps for cleaning fiber-
optic cables and HP universal adapters. The initial cleaning, using alcohol as a
solvent, gently removes any grit and oil. If a caked-on layer of material is still
present, this can happen if the beryllium-copper sides of the ferrule retainer
get scraped and deposited on the end of the fiber during insertion of the cable,
a second cleaning should be performed. It is not uncommon for a cable or con-
nector to require more than one cleaning.
C A U T I O N
not
be
Hewlett-Packard strongly recommends that index matching compounds
applied to their instruments and accessories. Some compounds, such as gels,
may be difficult to remove and can contain damaging particulates. If you think
the use of such compounds is necessary, refer to the compound manufacturer
for information on application and cleaning procedures.
6-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference
Cleaning Connections for Accurate Measurements
Table 6-3. Cleaning Accessories
Item
HP Part Number
Isopropyl alcohol
8500-5344
8520-0023
9300-1223
8500-5262
Cotton swabs
Small foam swabs
Compressed dust remover (non-residue)
Table 6-4. Dust Caps Available for Lightwave Instruments
Item
HP Part Number
Laser shutter cap
FC/PC dust cap
Biconic dust cap
DIN dust cap
08145-64521
08154-44102
08154-44105
5040-9364
HMS10/HP dust cap
ST dust cap
5040-9361
5040-9366
Cleaning a non-lensed connector
C A U T I O N
Do not use any type of foam swab to clean optical fiber ends. Foam swabs can
leave filmy deposits on fiber ends that can degrade performance.
1
2
Apply pure isopropyl alcohol to a clean lint-free cotton swab or lens paper.
Clean the ferrules and other parts of the connector while avoiding the end of
the fiber.
3
4
Apply isopropyl alcohol to a new clean lint-free cotton swab or lens paper.
Clean the fiber end with the swab or lens paper.
not
Do
scrub during this initial cleaning because grit can be caught in the
swab and become a gouging element.
6-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference
Cleaning Connections for Accurate Measurements
5
6
Immediately dry the fiber end with a clean, dry, lint-free cotton swab or lens
paper.
Blow across the connector end face from a distance of 6 to 8 inches using
filtered, dry, compressed air. Aim the compressed air at a shallow angle to the
fiber end face.
Nitrogen gas or compressed dust remover can also be used.
C A U T I O N
Do not shake, tip, or invert compressed air canisters. This releases particles
from the can into the air. Refer to the instructions on the compressed air
canister.
7
As soon as the connector is dry, connect or cover it for later use.
If the performance after the initial cleaning seems poor, try cleaning the con-
nector again. Often a second cleaning will restore proper performance. The
second cleaning should be more arduous, with a scrubbing action.
Cleaning an adapter
The fiber-optic input and output connectors on many HP instruments employ
a universal adapter such as those shown in the following picture. These adapt-
ers allow you to connect the instrument to different types of fiber-optic cables.
Figure 6-6. Universal adapters
1
2
Apply isopropyl alcohol to a clean foam swab.
Cotton swabs can be used as long as no cotton fibers remain after cleaning.
The foam swabs listed in the introduction to this section are small enough to
fit into adapters.
Although foam swabs can leave filmy deposits, these deposits are very thin,
and the risk of other contamination buildup on the inside of the adapters
greatly outweighs the risk of contamination by foam swabs.
Clean the adapter with the foam swab.
6-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference
Cleaning Connections for Accurate Measurements
3
4
Dry the inside of the adapter with a clean, dry foam swab.
Blow through the adapter using filtered, dry, compressed air.
C A U T I O N
Do not shake, tip, or invert compressed air canisters. This releases particles
from the can into the air. Refer to the instructions on the compressed air
canister.
6-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference
Returning the Instrument for Service
Returning the Instrument for Service
The instructions in this section show you how to properly package the instru-
ment for return to a Hewlett-Packard service office. For a list of offices, refer
to “Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service Offices” on page 6-24.
If the instrument is still under warranty or is covered by an HP maintenance
contract, it will be repaired under the terms of the warranty or contract (the
warranty is at the front of this manual). If the instrument is no longer under
warranty or is not covered by an HP maintenance plan, Hewlett-Packard will
notify you of the cost of the repair after examining the unit.
When an instrument is returned to a Hewlett-Packard service office for servic-
ing, it must be adequately packaged and have a complete description of the
failure symptoms attached.
When describing the failure, please be as specific as possible about the nature
of the problem. Include copies of additional failure information (such as the
instrument failure settings, data related to instrument failure, and error mes-
sages) along with the original cal data disks and the instrument being
returned.
Please notify the service office before returning your instrument for service.
Any special arrangements for the instrument can be discussed at this time.
This will help the HP service office repair and return your instrument as
quickly as possible.
Preparing the instrument for shipping
1
Write a complete description of the failure and attach it to the instrument.
Include any specific performance details related to the problem. The following
6-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference
Returning the Instrument for Service
information should be returned with the instrument.
• Type of service required.
• Date instrument was returned for repair.
• Description of the problem:
• Whether problem is constant or intermittent.
• Whether instrument is temperature-sensitive.
• Whether instrument is vibration-sensitive.
• Instrument settings required to reproduce the problem.
• Performance data.
• Company name and return address.
• Name and phone number of technical contact person.
• Model number of returned instrument.
• Full serial number of returned instrument.
• List of any accessories returned with instrument.
• The original cal data disks.
2
Cover all front or rear-panel connectors that were originally covered when you
first received the instrument.
C A U T I O N
C A U T I O N
Cover electrical connectors to protect sensitive components from electrostatic
damage. Cover optical connectors to protect them from damage due to physical
contact or dust.
Instrument damage can result from using packaging materials other than the
original materials. Never use styrenepellets as packaging material. They do not
adequately cushion the instrument or prevent it from shifting in the carton.
They may also cause instrument damage by generating static electricity.
3
Pack the instrument in the original shipping containers. Original materials are
available through any Hewlett-Packard office. Or, use the following guidelines:
• Wrap the instrument in antistatic plastic to reduce the possibility of damage
caused by electrostatic discharge.
• For instruments weighing less than 54 kg (120 lb), use a double-walled, cor-
rugated cardboard carton of 159 kg (350 lb) test strength.
• The carton must be large enough to allow approximately 7 cm (3 inches) on
all sides of the instrument for packing material, and strong enough to accom-
modate the weight of the instrument.
• Surround the equipment with approximately 7 cm (3 inches) of packing ma-
terial, to protect the instrument and prevent it from moving in the carton. If
packing foam is not available, the best alternative is S.D-240 Air Cap™ from
6-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference
Returning the Instrument for Service
Sealed Air Corporation (Commerce, California 90001). Air Cap looks like a
plastic sheet filled with air bubbles. Use the pink (antistatic) Air Cap™ to
reduce static electricity. Wrapping the instrument several times in this ma-
terial will protect the instrument and prevent it from moving in the carton.
4
5
6
Seal the carton with strong nylon adhesive tape.
Mark the carton “FRAGILE, HANDLE WITH CARE”.
Retain copies of all shipping papers.
6-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference
Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service Offices
Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service Offices
Before returning an instrument for service, call the HP Instrument Support
Center at (800) 403-0801.
Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service Offices (1 of 2)
U.S. FIELD OPERATIONS
Headquarters
California, Northern
Hewlett-Packard Company
301 East Evelyn
Mountain View, CA 94041
(415) 694-2000
California, Southern
Hewlett-Packard Company
1421 South Manhatten Ave.
Fullerton, CA 92631
Hewlett-Packard Company
19320 Pruneridge Avenue
Cupertino, CA 95014 U.S.A.
(800) 752-0900
(714) 999-6700
Colorado
Georgia
Illinois
Hewlett-Packard Company
24 Inverness Place, East
Englewood, CO 80112
(303) 649-5000
Hewlett-Packard Company
2000 South Park Place
Atlanta, GA 30339
(404) 955-1500
Hewlett-Packard Company
5201 Tollview Drive
Rolling Meadows, IL 60008
(708) 342-2000
New Jersey
Texas
Hewlett-Packard Company
150 Green Pond Road, Dock 1
Rockaway, NJ 07866
(201) 586-5910
Hewlett-Packard Company
930 East Campbell Road
Richardson, TX 75081
(214) 231-6101
EUROPEAN FIELD OPERATIONS
Headquarters
France
Germany
Hewlett-Packard S.A.
150, Route du Nant-d’Avril
1217 Meyrin 2/Geneva Switzerland
(41 22) 780.8111
Hewlett-Packard France
1 Avenue Du Canada
Zone D’Activite De Courtaboeuf
F-91947 Les Ulis Cedex France
(33 1) 69 82 60 60
Hewlett-Packard GmbH
Hewlett-Packard Strasse
61352 Bad Homburg Germany
(+49 6172) 16-0
Great Britain
Hewlett-Packard Ltd.
Eskdale Road, Winnersh Triangle
Wokingham, Berkshire RG11 5DZ
6-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference
Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service Offices
Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service Offices (2 of 2)
INTERCON FIELD OPERATIONS
Headquarters
Australia
Canada
Hewlett-Packard Company
3495 Deer Creek Rd.
Palo Alto, California 94304-1316
(415) 857-5027
Hewlett-Packard Australia Ltd.
31-41 Joseph Street
Blackburn, Victoria 3130
(61 3) 895-2895
Hewlett-Packard Ltd.
17500 South Service Road
Trans-Canada Highway
Kirkland, Quebec H9J 2X8
Canada
(514) 697-4232
China
Japan
Singapore
China Hewlett-Packard Company
38 Bei San Huan X1 Road
Shuang Yu Shu
Hai Dian District
Beijing, China
Hackioji-Hewlett-Packard Ltd.
9-1 Takakura-Cho, Hachioji
Tokyo 192, Japan
Hewlett-Packard Singapore Ltd.
Pte. Ltd.
Alexandra P.O. Box 87
Singapore 9115
(65) 271-9444
(+81-26) 60-2111
(86 1) 256-6888
Taiwan
Hewlett-Packard Taiwan
8th Floor, H-P Building
337 Fu Hsing North Road
Taipei, Taiwan
(886 2) 712-0404
6-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference
Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service Offices
6-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications and Regulatory Information
Specifications and Regulatory Information
Specifications and Regulatory Information
This chapter contains specifications and characteristics for HP 86140 series
optical spectrum analyzers.
The specifications in this chapter apply to all functions autocoupled over the
°
°
temperature range 0 C to +55 C and relative humidity < 95% (unless other-
wise noted). All specifications apply after the instrument’s temperature has
been stabilized after 1 hour continuous operation and the auto-align routine
has been run. Unless otherwise noted, specifications apply without USER
CAL.
Calibration Cycle
This instrument requires periodic verification of performance. The instrument
should have a complete verification of specifications at least once every two
years.
7-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications and Regulatory Information
Definition of Terms
Definition of Terms
Characteristics
and specifications
characteristics
is described as fol-
The distinction between specifications and
lows:
Specifications
describe warranted performance.
Characteristics
provide useful, but nonwarranted information about the func-
Characteristics are printed in
tions and performance of the instrument.
italics
.
Wavelength
Absolute Accuracy (after user cal)
refers to the wavelength accuracy after
the user has performed the internal wavelength calibration using a source of
known wavelength.
Reproducibility
refers to the amount of wavelength drift which can occur
over the specified time while the OSA is swept across a source of known wave-
length.
Tuning Repeatability
refers to the wavelength accuracy of returning to a
wavelength after having tuned to a different wavelength.
Resolution
FWHM
refers to the Full-Width-Half-Maximum resolutions that are available.
This indicates the width at half power level of the signal after passing through
the resolution slits.
7-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications and Regulatory Information
Definition of Terms
Amplitude
Sensitivity
is defined as the signal level that is equal to six times the RMS
value of the noise. Displayed sensitivity values are nominal. Slightly lower val-
ues may have to be entered to achieve specified sensitivity.
Scale Fidelity
refers to the potential errors in amplitude readout at ampli-
tudes other than at the calibration point. This specification is sometimes
called linearity.
Flatness
refers to the total amplitude flatness errors over the indicated wave-
length range. (This error may be removed at a given wavelength by perform-
ing the user amplitude cal.)
Polarization Dependence
refers to the amplitude change that can be seen by
varying the polarization of the light entering the OSA. This is not to be con-
fused with amplitude variations caused by the varying distribution of energy
between the different modes in fiber that is multimode at the wavelength of
interest.
Dynamic range
Sweep time
Dynamic Range
is a measure of the ability to see low-level signals that are
located very close (in wavelength) to a stronger signal. In electrical spectrum
analyzers, this characteristic is generally called shape factor.
Maximum Sweep Rate
refers to the maximum rate that the instrument is
able to acquire data and display it. This rate may be limited by multiple inter-
nal processes.
Sweep Cycle Time
refers to the time required to make a complete sweep and
prepare for the next sweep. It can be measured as the time from the start of
one sweep to the start of the next sweep.
7-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications and Regulatory Information
Specifications
Specifications
HP 86140A and HP 86143A
HP 86142A and HP 86145A
WAVELENGTH
Range
600 nm to 1700 nm
600 nm to 1700 nm
0.2 nm to full range and zero span
0.2 nm to full range and zero span
Accuracy
After calibration with internal wavelength
reference signal a
±0.025 nm (1510–1570),
±0.035 nm (1570–1640)
±0.025 nm (1510–1570),
±0.035 nm (1570–1640)
After user calibration within ±40 nm of
calibration signal a
±0.05 nm
±0.05 nm
After user calibration over full wavelength
range a
Absolute accuracy (2 year factory calibration
cycle) a
±0.2 nm
±0.5 nm
±0.2 nm
±0.5 nm
a
±0.003 nm
±0.05 nm, for spans <40 nm
±0.02 nm
±0.003 nm
±0.05 nm, for spans < 40 nm
±0.02 nm
Reproducibility, ≤ 1 minute
Span Linearity a,b
,
a b
Span Linearity (1525 to 1570 nm)
Tuning Repeatability a
±0.003 nm
±0.003 nm
RESOLUTION BANDWIDTH (RBW)
FWHM (selectable) a,c
0.07, 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1, 2, 5, 10 nm
0.06, 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1, 2, 5, 10 nm
Corrected Resolution Bandwidth
Accuracy (using noise markers)a
≥0.5 nm, 1525 to 1610 nm
0.2 nm, 1525 to 1610 nm
0.1 nm, 1525 to 1610 nm
±4%
±6%
±12%
±3%
±5%
±10%
7-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications and Regulatory Information
Specifications
HP 86140A and HP 86143A
HP 86142A and HP 86145A
AMPLITUDE
Sensitivity d
600 to 750 nm (no averaging required) e
750 to 900 nm (no averaging required) e
900 to 1250 nm (no averaging required) e
1250 to 1610 nm (no averaging required) e
1610 to 1700 nm (no averaging required) b
Maximum Measurement Power
1525 to 1700 nm
–60 dBm
–75 dBm
–75 dBm
–90 dBm
–80 dBm
–60 dBm
–75 dBm
–75 dBm
–90 dBm
–80 dBm
+15 dBm
+15 dBm
+12 dBm
+15 dBm
+15 dBm
+12 dBm
600 to 1000 nm
1000 to 1525 nm
Maximum Safe Power
Total Safe Power
Total Power, within any 10 nm portion of the
spectrum
+30 dBm
+23 dBm
+30 dBm
+23 dBm
Calibration Accuracy at –20 dBm, 1310 nm/
±0.5 dB
±0.5 dB
1550 nm f
Scale Fidelity
b,g
±0.07 dB
±0.1 dB
±0.05 dB
±0.07 dB
Autorange off, ≤0 dBm
Autorange on, ≤0 dBm
,
b g
Display Scale (log scale)
0.01 to 20 dB/Div,
0.01 to 20 dB/Div,
–120 to +90 dBm
–120 to +90 dBm
±0.01 dB at 1 min
±0.02 dB at 15 min.
±0.01 dB at 1 min
±0.02 dB at 15 min.
Flatness
1290 to 1330 nm a, f
1525 to 1570 nm a, f
1525 to 1610 nm a, f
1250 to 1610 nm a,h, f
Polarization Dependence a,i,j
1310 nm
±0.2 dB
±0.2 dB
—
±0.2 dB
—
±0.2 dB
±0.7 dB
±0.7 dB
±0.25 dB
±0.2 dB
±0.25 dB
±0.3 dB
±0.4 dB
±0.12 dB
±0.05 dB
±0.08 dB
±0.25 dB
—
1530 nm, 1565 nm
1600 nm
1250 to 1650 nm
1250 to 1650 nm (Option 025)
7-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications and Regulatory Information
Specifications
HP 86140A and HP 86143A
HP 86142A and HP 86145A
DYNAMIC RANGE
,k
In 0.1 nm resolution a
1250 to 1610 nm (chop mode on) at ±0.5 nm,
±1 nm, ±5 nm
1550 nm at ±0.8 nm
(±100 GHz at 1550 nm)
1550 nm at ±0.5 nm
(±62.5 GHz at 1550 nm)
1550 nm at ±0.4 nm
(±50 GHz at 1550 nm)
1550 nm at ±0.2 nm
(±25 GHz at 1550 nm)
–70 dB
–60 dB
–55 dB
–52 dB
—
–70 dB
–60 dB
–58 dB
–55 dB
–40 dB
MONOCHROMATOR INPUT
Input Return Loss
Straight connector (9/125 µm) l
>35 dB
>35 dB
PULSE MODE ACCURACY
Turn On (≥ 2 µs after rising edge)
Turn Off (≥ 10 µs after falling edge)
SWEEP
< ±0.2 dB (starting from dark)
< ±0.2 dB
< ±0.2 dB (starting from dark)
< ±0.2 dB (30 dB extinction)
Maximum Sweep Rate
40 nm/50 ms
Maximum Sampling Rate in Zero Span
Sweep Cycle Time
50 µs/trace point
50 nm span, auto zero off
50 nm span, auto zero on
100 nm span, auto zero on
Full span, auto zero on
<180 ms
< 340 ms
< 400 ms
< 1 s
Sweep Cycle Time (30 nm span auto zero on)
–80 dBm sensitivity d
–90 dBm sensitivity d
1.8 s
32 s
ADC Trigger Accuracy
Jitter (distributed uniformly)
Trigger Delay range
< ±0.5 µs
2 µs— 6.5 ms
7-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications and Regulatory Information
Specifications
HP 86140A and HP 86143A
HP 86142A and HP 86145A
COMPUTER INTERFACING
Remote Control
Compatibility
Interfaces
IEEE-488.1, IEEE-488.2 (100%)
HP-IB, Parallel Printer Port, External VGA Monitor,
Keyboard (PS/2) and Mouse
Floppy Disk
Data Export
Graphics Export
Instrument Drivers
3.5 inch 1.44 MB, MS-DOS
Spreadsheet and Word Processor Compatible (CSV ASCII)
CGM
Universal Instrument Drivers (PNP),
Compatible with HP VEE, Labview, Visual Basic and C++
a. With applied input fiber 9/125 µm.
b. Temperature range 20° to 30°C.
c. Resolution of 10 nm is available in first order only.
d. Sensitivity is defined as signal value >6 × RMS noise value.
e. Temperature range 0° to 30°C.
f. For resolution ≥0.1 nm.
g. Excluding amplitude errors at low power levels due to noise.
h. Between 1350 nm and 1420 nm absorption of light by atmospheric moisture affects flatness.
i. For resolution ≥0.2 nm.
j. At room temperature.
k. Excluding multiple order grating response.
l. Depends on the quality of the attached connector.
7-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications and Regulatory Information
Specifications
General Specifications
HP 86140A and HP 86142A
HP 86143A and HP 86145A
Portable
Benchtop
222 mm H × 425 mm W × 427 mm D
(8.8 in × 16.8 in × 16.8 in)
163 mm H × 325 mm W × 427 mm D
(6.4 in × 12.8 in × 16.8 in)
Dimensions
16.5 kg (36 lb)
14.5 kg (31 lb)
Weight
Environmental
Temperaturea
Humidity
Altitude
EMI
Operating: 0°C to 55°C; Storage: –40°C to 70°C
Operating: < 95% RH; Storage: Non-condensing
Up to 15,000 feet (4,572 meters)
Conducted and radiated interference is in compliance with
CISPR Publication 11,
IEC 801-3, IEC 801-4, and IEC 555-2
Power Requirements
Voltage and Frequency
Maximum Power Consumption
90 Vac to 260 Vac, 44 to 444 Hz
230 W
a. Floppy disk and printer operating temperature range 0°C to 45°C.
Option 004/005 EELED Sources
HP 86140A and HP 86142A
a
Minimum Spectral Power Density
1540 to 1560 nm (Option 005)
1470 to 1620 nm (Option 005)
> –40 dBm/nm (100 nW/nm)
> –60 dBm/nm (1 nW/nm)
1300 to 1320 nm (Option 004)
1540 to 1560 nm (Option 004)
> –40 dBm/nm (100 nW/nm)
> –40 dBm/nm (100 nW/nm)
1250 to 1620 nm (Option 004)
Return Loss
> –60 dBm/nm (1 nW/nm)
With straight connector
Stability (ambient temperature <±1°C)
Over 15 minutes
> 25 dB
< ±0.02 dB
< ±0.05 dB
Over 6 hours
a. Temperature range 0°C to 45°C.
7-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications and Regulatory Information
Regulatory Information
Regulatory Information
• Laser Classification: This product contains an FDA Laser Class I (IEC Laser
Class 1) laser.
• This product complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11.
Notice for Germany: Noise Declaration
Acoustic Noise Emission
LpA < 70 dB
Geraeuschemission
LpA < 70 dB
Operator position
Normal position
per ISO 7779
am Arbeitsplatz
normaler Betrieb
nach DIN 45635 t.19
7-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications and Regulatory Information
Regulatory Information
7-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
A
Auto Align key, 2-3, 2-21, 3-3
automatic
absolute accuracy, 7-3
ac line-power cords, 6-4
accessories, 6-2
connecting, 1-5
static-safe, 6-7
accuracy
absolute/differential, 7-3
amplitude, 3-2
active
area, moving, 3-47
function area assist, 3-44
marker, setting, 3-23
trace, setting, 3-23, 3-57
Active Marker.... softkey, 3-23, 3-26–3-27
adapters, fiber-optic, 6-6
ADC trigger softkeys, 3-19
adding parameters in commands, 4-8
alignment
automatic, 2-3, 2-20, 3-2–3-3
multi-point, 3-52
All Math Off softkey, 3-59
amplitude
accuracy, 3-2
units, setting, 3-12
ADC trigger, 3-19
gated trigger, 3-18
resolution bandwidth, 3-15
vertical scale, 3-9
Amplitude functions
display mode, 3-10
peak to reference level, 3-11
reference level, 3-9
sensitivity, 3-10
Amplitude menu, 2-12, 3-8
Amplitude Setup... softkey, 3-11
Appl’s key, 2-3
Applications menu, 2-10, 2-13
applications, accessing, 2-3
auto
cycle, 7-2
wavelength, 3-45–3-46, 3-63
CALibration subsystem commands, 4-68
Calibration.... softkey, 3-44
care of fiber optics, iii, 1-9
case sensitivity in commands, 4-7
catalog file, selecting, 3-37
center wavelength, 3-62
with markers, 3-24
chop mode, setting, 3-13
ranging, setting, 3-12
Index-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
Center WL softkey, 3-62
characteristics, 7-2–7-9
Choose Files to Save softkey, 3-36
classification, laser, 7-10
cleaning
default
connections, 6-10
printer head, 6-7
Close Panel.... softkey, 3-65
colon, use in commands, 4-8
command trees, 4-37
commands
CALibration subsystem, 4-68
combining, 4-7
common, 4-42
FORMat subsystem, 4-76
HCOPy subsystem, 4-77
INITiate subsystem, 4-78
long form, 4-7
MEMory subsystem, 4-79
MMEMory subsystem, 4-80
SENSe subsystem, 4-81
short form, 4-7
STATus subsystem, 4-91
SYSTem subsystem, 4-93
termination, 4-9
peak to center, 3-63
TRACe subsystem, 4-95
UNIT subsystem, 4-101
common commands, 4-42
sending, 4-8
connecting
accessories, 1-5
dry connections, 6-15
dust caps, 6-18
fiber-optic cables, 1-9
printer, 1-6
dynamic range, 7-4
connector, characterizing, 6-16
cotton swabs, 6-18
EELED source specifications, 7-9
Electrostatic (ESD) information, 6-7
entering a filename, 3-36
EOI signal in commands, 4-9
error
cycle time, sweep, 7-4
D
date
displaying, 3-42
displaying, 3-43
queue, 4-15
Index-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
error messages
Bandwidth not found, 3-24
settings conflict, 4-9
Exchange Menu.... softkey, 3-59
External softkey, 3-19
external trigger, 3-19
G
Gated softkey, 3-18
gated trigger, 3-18
F
HCOPy subsystem commands, 4-77
factory
preset, setting, 3-49
Fast Meas SAVE softkey, 3-39
fiber optics
adapters, 6-6
care of, iii, 1-9
instrument
changing settings, 2-2
connecting, 1-9
file deletion, 3-38
File menu, 2-10
filename
entering, 3-36
saving, 3-36
firmware revision, displaying, 3-42
firmware, upgrading, 3-50
flatness, 7-4
floppy disk
deleting a file, 3-38
saving data, 3-36
front panel
fiber-optic adapters, 6-6
HP 86140/2, 2-4
HP 86143/5, 2-6
keys, 3-3
lockout, 4-4
menus, 3-7
internal trigger, 3-18
interpolation, normal/delta marker, 3-31
isopropyl alcohol, 6-18
overview, 2-2
power switch, 1-8
tutorial, 2-20
function area assist, 3-44
FWHM resolution, 7-3
L
laser classification, 7-10
Line Marker Menu.... softkey, 3-28
Index-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
line markers
integrating, 3-30
searching between, 3-29
sweep between, 3-29
wavelength, 3-28
Line Markers Off softkey, 3-29
line power
measurement
cords, 6-4
averaging, 3-60
Local key, 3-5
LOCAL softkey, 4-4
long form commands, 4-7
M
marker, 3-54
line, searching between, 3-29
line, sweep between, 3-29
search threshold, setting, 3-33
settings, default, 3-30
types, 2-22
Marker menu, 2-15, 3-21
Marker to CENTER softkey, 3-24
Markers functions
active marker, 3-23
active trace, 3-23
center wavelength, 3-24
delta marker, 3-28
integrate between line markers, 3-30
line markers off, 3-29
measure bandwidth, 3-24
noise marker, 3-27
peak search, 3-25
pit search, 3-26
Noise Marker softkey, 3-27
units, setting, 3-31
reference level, 3-25
normal/delta marker interpolation, 3-31
notices, displaying, 3-42
numbers in commands, 4-9
search between line markers, 3-29
sweep between line markers, 3-29
total power integration, 3-28
wavelength line markers, 3-28
math
O
offset, wavelength, 3-63
functions, setting, 3-59
Index-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
OPTICAL INPUT connector, 2-3
optimize sensitivity, 3-54
options, 6-2
Options menu, 2-10
OSA
Print key, 2-22, 3-6
printer
display, 2-8
Restore Utility screen, 3-39
State information panel, 3-47
OSA Extended State.... softkey, 3-53
OSA State.... softkey, 3-47
output
setup, 3-44
Printer Setup.... softkey, 3-44
printing
queue, 4-10, 4-15
synchronous, 3-20
overview of the front panel, 2-2
OVR SWEEP annotation, 3-17
programming
commands, 4-42–4-101
P
package contents, 1-3
packaging for shipment, 6-22
panels, setup, 3-65
parameters, adding command, 4-8
peak excursion, setting, 3-32
peak search
performing, 2-21, 3-25
using markers, 3-24
PEAK SEARCH softkey, 3-24–3-25
Peak to CENTER softkey, 3-63
Peak to REF LEVEL softkey, 3-11
Pit Search softkey, 3-26
pit search, performing, 3-26
polarization dependence, 7-4
power
rear panel
cords, 6-4
Recall Menu.... softkey, 3-37
REF annotation, 3-9
reference level, 3-9–3-12
with markers, 3-25
requirements, 1-7
switch, 1-8
Power Cal Setup.... softkey, 3-44
power calibration
Reference Level softkey, 3-9
regulatory information, 7-10
Remote annotation, 4-4
remote commands/front panel functions, 4-31
amplitude, setting, 3-45
date, 3-13, 3-45
performing, 3-44
setting, 3-13
Index-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
remote interface
Set HPIB Address softkey, 3-55
software applications, 2-3
automatic alignment, 3-3
repeat sweep, 3-17
Repeat Sweep softkey, 3-17
repeatability, tuning, 7-3
reproducibility, 7-3
Res BW softkey, 3-15
resolution
bandwidth, 3-15
FWHM, 7-3
Restore Utility screen, 3-39
return loss, connectors, 6-16
returning data, 4-10
Revision.... softkey, 3-42
S
safety information, iii
Save Menu.... softkey, 3-35
Save/Recall functions
deleting a file, 3-38
recalling data, 3-37
recalling in Fast Recall mode, 3-39
saving data, 3-35
saving in Fast Save mode, 3-39
selecting a catalog file, 3-37
Save/Recall menu, 3-34
scale fidelity, 7-4
Scale/Div softkey, 3-9
SCPI commands
standard, 4-2
Search Mode.... softkey, 3-25
semicolon, use in commands, 4-7
sending common commands, 4-8
SENSe subsystem commands, 4-81
sensitivity, 3-10, 7-4
synchronous output, 3-20
syntax rules, 4-6–4-10
System functions
active area, moving, 3-47
adding a title, 3-42
optimizing, 3-54
See also sweep time, video bandwidth
Sensitivity softkey, 3-10
service, 6-21
automeasure defaults, 3-53
changing the display, 3-43
displaying firmware revision, 3-42
Index-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
factory preset (IP), 3-49
HP-IB address, 3-55
multi-point alignment, 3-52
OSA Extended State panel, 3-53
OSA State panel, 3-47
power calibration, 3-44
power-on state, 3-48
printer setup, 3-44
set time/date, 3-48
TransZ 2 - 3 Lock, 3-52
U
units, wavelength, 3-63
user
wavelength calibration, 3-45
System menu, 2-17, 3-40
SYSTem subsystem commands, 4-93
T
time
displaying, 3-43
setting, 3-48
title, displaying, 3-42
trace
video bandwidth, 3-15
active, setting, 3-57
display, 3-57
integration, 3-28
recall data, 3-37
save data, 3-35
updating, 3-57
Trace Integ softkey, 3-28
Trace Math.... softkey, 3-58
Traces functions
averaging, 3-60
wavelength
calibration, performing, 3-45
limits, setting, 3-51
line markers, 3-28
offset, 3-63
displaying the trace, 3-57
hold trace, 3-58
math trace defaults, 3-58
update trace, 3-57
X- and Y-axis data, 3-59
Traces menu, 2-18, 3-56
TransZ 2-3 Lock softkey, 3-52
trigger
peak, 3-63
referenced value, 3-46
setting cal source, 3-46
span, 3-62
delay, 3-20
external, 3-19
span, setting, 3-54
Index-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
start/stop, 3-62
step size, 3-64
units, 3-63
Wavelength functions
center wavelength, 3-62
centering the peak wavelength, 3-63
default settings, 3-63
span, 3-62
start wavelength, 3-62
stop wavelength, 3-62
Wavelength Limit softkey, 3-51
Wavelength Line Mkr softkey, 3-28
Wavelength Setup.... softkey, 3-63
web site information, 1-10
white space characters in commands, 4-8
wire bail, positioning, 1-4
X
X-axis trace data, 3-59
Y
Y-axis trace data, 3-59
Z
ZERO NOW softkey, 3-13, 3-51
Zero Now softkey, 3-50
zero span, 3-62
zeroing the instrument, 3-50
Index-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|